1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2019-03-03.15} 7 8% 9% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 10% 11% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 12% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 13% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 14% License, or (at your option) any later version. 15% 16% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 17% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 18% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 19% General Public License for more details. 20% 21% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 22% along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 23% 24% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 25% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 26% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7 27% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). 28% 29% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 30% reports; you can get the latest version from: 31% https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or 32% https://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or 33% https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page) 34% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 35% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 36% 37% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a 38% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 39% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 40% 41% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 42% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 43% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 44% tex foo.texi 45% texindex foo.?? 46% tex foo.texi 47% tex foo.texi 48% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 49% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 50% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 51% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 52% 53% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 54% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 55% full Texinfo distribution. 56% 57% The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 58 59 60\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 61 62% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 63% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 64% they might have appeared in the input file name. 65\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 66 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 67 68% LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for 69% are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex. 70\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}% 71 72\chardef\other=12 73 74% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 75% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 76\let\+ = \relax 77 78% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 79\let\ptexb=\b 80\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 81\let\ptexc=\c 82\let\ptexcomma=\, 83\let\ptexdot=\. 84\let\ptexdots=\dots 85\let\ptexend=\end 86\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 87\let\ptexexclam=\! 88\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 89\let\ptexgtr=> 90\let\ptexhat=^ 91\let\ptexi=\i 92\let\ptexindent=\indent 93\let\ptexinsert=\insert 94\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 95\let\ptexless=< 96\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 97\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 98\let\ptexplus=+ 99\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright 100\let\ptexrbrace=\} 101\let\ptexslash=\/ 102\let\ptexsp=\sp 103\let\ptexstar=\* 104\let\ptexsup=\sup 105\let\ptext=\t 106\let\ptextop=\top 107{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode 108 109% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 110% starts a new line in the output. 111\newlinechar = `^^J 112 113% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 114% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 115% 116\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 117 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 118\else 119 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 120\fi 121 122% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 123\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 124\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 125\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi 126\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 127\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 128\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 129\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 130\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 131\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 132\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 133\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 134\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 135\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 136\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 137\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 138\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 139\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 140\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 141\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 142\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 143% 144\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 145\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 146\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 147\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 148\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 149\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 150\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 151\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 152\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 153\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 154\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 155\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 156% 157\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 158\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 159\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 160\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 161\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 162 163% Give the space character the catcode for a space. 164\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax} 165 166% Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character. 167\def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax} 168 169\chardef\dashChar = `\- 170\chardef\slashChar = `\/ 171\chardef\underChar = `\_ 172 173% Ignore a token. 174% 175\def\gobble#1{} 176 177% The following is used inside several \edef's. 178\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 179 180% Hyphenation fixes. 181\hyphenation{ 182 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 183 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 184 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 185 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 186 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 187 spell-ing spell-ings 188 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 189 wide-spread wrap-around 190} 191 192% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 193% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 194% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 195% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 196% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 197% 198\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 199\def\loggingall{% 200 \tracingstats2 201 \tracingpages1 202 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 203 \tracingparagraphs1 204 \tracingoutput1 205 \tracingmacros2 206 \tracingrestores1 207 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 208 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging 209 \tracingscantokens1 210 \tracingifs1 211 \tracinggroups1 212 \tracingnesting2 213 \tracingassigns1 214 \fi 215 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 216 \errorcontextlines16 217}% 218 219% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things 220% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, 221% after all. 222% 223\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} 224\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} 225 226% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 227% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 228% 229\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 230 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 231\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 232 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 233\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 234 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 235 236% Output routine 237% 238 239% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 240% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 241% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 242% 243\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } 244 245\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 246\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 247 248% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 249% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 250% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 251% 252% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 253% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 254% 255% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 256% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 257% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. 258 259% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one 260% mark before the section break, and one after. 261% In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \currentchapterdefs, 262% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \currentsectiondefs. 263% Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous 264% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section 265% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top. 266% @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark. 267% 268% See page 260 of The TeXbook. 269\def\domark{% 270 \toks0=\expandafter{\currentchapterdefs}% 271 \toks2=\expandafter{\currentsectiondefs}% 272 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 273 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 274 \toks8=\expandafter{\currentcolordefs}% 275 \mark{% 276 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top 277 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom 278 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks 279 }% 280} 281 282% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks, 283% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark. 284% 285% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 286% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 287% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 288% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 289% first @chapter. 290\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 291 \ifcase0\the\savedtopmark\fi 292 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 293} 294\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 295\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\the\savedtopmark\fi} 296 297% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 298\def\currentchapterdefs{} 299\def\currentsectiondefs{} 300\def\currentsection{} 301\def\prevchapterdefs{} 302\def\prevsectiondefs{} 303\def\currentcolordefs{} 304 305% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 306\newdimen\bindingoffset 307\newdimen\normaloffset 308\newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight 309 310% Main output routine. 311% 312\chardef\PAGE = 255 313\newtoks\defaultoutput 314\defaultoutput = {\savetopmark\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 315\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput} 316 317\newbox\headlinebox 318\newbox\footlinebox 319 320% When outputting the double column layout for indices, an output routine 321% is run several times, which hides the original value of \topmark. This 322% can lead to a page heading being output and duplicating the chapter heading 323% of the index. Hence, save the contents of \topmark at the beginning of 324% the output routine. The saved contents are valid until we actually 325% \shipout a page. 326% 327% (We used to run a short output routine to actually set \topmark and 328% \firstmark to the right values, but if this was called with an empty page 329% containing whatsits for writing index entries, the whatsits would be thrown 330% away and the index auxiliary file would remain empty.) 331% 332\newtoks\savedtopmark 333\newif\iftopmarksaved 334\topmarksavedtrue 335\def\savetopmark{% 336 \iftopmarksaved\else 337 \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark}% 338 \global\topmarksavedtrue 339 \fi 340} 341 342% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. 343% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer 344% and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page to be written 345% to the auxiliary files. 346% 347\def\onepageout#1{% 348 \hoffset=\normaloffset 349 % 350 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 351 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 352 % 353 % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page, 354 % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the 355 % values in \headline and \footline. 356 % 357 % This is used to check if we are on the first page of a chapter. 358 \ifcase1\the\savedtopmark\fi 359 \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername 360 \ifcase0\firstmark\fi 361 \let\curchaptername\thischaptername 362 % 363 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 364 % 365 \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername 366 \let\thischapterheading\thischapter 367 \else 368 % \thischapterheading is the same as \thischapter except it is blank 369 % for the first page of a chapter. This is to prevent the chapter name 370 % being shown twice. 371 \def\thischapterheading{}% 372 \fi 373 % 374 % Common context changes for both heading and footing. 375 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 376 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 377 \def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars} 378 % 379 \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}% 380 % 381 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 382 \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}% 383 % 384 {% 385 % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files. 386 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 387 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 388 % before the \shipout runs. 389 % 390 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 391 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if 392 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. 393 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: 394 % \entry{{\indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} 395 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; 396 % it needs to be 397 % {\code {{\backslashcurfont }acronym} 398 \shipout\vbox{% 399 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 400 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 401 % 402 \unvbox\headlinebox 403 \pagebody{#1}% 404 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 405 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 406 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 407 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 408 \vskip 24pt 409 \unvbox\footlinebox 410 \fi 411 % 412 }% 413 }% 414 \global\topmarksavedfalse 415 \advancepageno 416 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 417} 418 419\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 420 421% Main part of page, including any footnotes 422\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 423{\catcode`\@ =11 424\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 425% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 426\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 427 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 428\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 429\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 430\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 431} 432 433 434% Argument parsing 435 436% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 437% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 438% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 439% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}. 440% 441\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 442\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 443 \def\argtorun{#2}% 444 \begingroup 445 \obeylines 446 \spaceisspace 447 #1% 448 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 449} 450 451{\obeylines % 452 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 453 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 454 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 455 }% 456} 457 458% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Also remove a @texinfoc 459% comment (see \scanmacro for details). Pass the result on to \argcheckspaces. 460\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 461\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argremovetexinfoc #1\texinfoc\ArgTerm} 462\def\argremovetexinfoc#1\texinfoc#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 463 464% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 465% 466% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 467% @end itemize @c foo 468% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 469% by \finishparsearg. 470% 471\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 472\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 473\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 474 \def\temp{#3}% 475 \ifx\temp\empty 476 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 477 \let\temp\finishparsearg 478 \else 479 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 480 \fi 481 % Put the space token in: 482 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 483} 484 485% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 486% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 487% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 488% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 489% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 490% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 491% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 492% 493% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 494% 495\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 496 497 498% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line 499% 500% \parseargdef\foo{...} 501% is roughly equivalent to 502% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 503% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 504\def\parseargdef#1{% 505 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 506} 507\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 508 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 509 \def#1##1% 510} 511 512% Several utility definitions with active space: 513{ 514 \obeyspaces 515 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 516 517 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 518 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 519 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 520 % should produce a line of output anyway. 521 % 522 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 523 524 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 525 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 526 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 527 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 528} 529 530 531\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 532 533% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 534% 535% \envdef\foo{...} 536% \def\Efoo{...} 537% 538% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 539% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 540% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 541% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 542% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 543% 544% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 545% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 546% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 547% special case.) 548 549 550% At run-time, environments start with this: 551\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 552% initialize 553\let\thisenv\empty 554 555% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 556\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 557\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 558 559% Check whether we're in the right environment: 560\def\checkenv#1{% 561 \def\temp{#1}% 562 \ifx\thisenv\temp 563 \else 564 \badenverr 565 \fi 566} 567 568% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 569\def\badenverr{% 570 \errhelp = \EMsimple 571 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 572 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 573} 574\def\inenvironment#1{% 575 \ifx#1\empty 576 outside of any environment% 577 \else 578 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 579 \fi 580} 581 582% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 583% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 584% 585\parseargdef\end{% 586 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 587 \else 588 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. 589 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 590 \csname E#1\endcsname 591 \endgroup 592 \fi 593} 594 595\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 596 597 598% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 599% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 600% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 601% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 602% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 603{\catcode`@ = 11 604 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 605 % if the definition is written into an index file. 606 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 607 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 608} 609 610% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 611\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 612 613% @* forces a line break. 614\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 615 616% @/ allows a line break. 617\let\/=\allowbreak 618 619% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 620\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 621 622% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 623\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 624 625% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 626\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 627 628% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 629% 630\def\onword{on} 631\def\offword{off} 632% 633\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 634 \def\temp{#1}% 635 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 636 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 637 \else 638 \errhelp = \EMsimple 639 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% 640 \fi\fi 641} 642 643% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 644% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 645% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 646\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 647 648% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 649% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 650% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 651% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 652% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 653% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 654% the text is small, which looks bad. 655% 656% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 657% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 658% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 659% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 660% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 661% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 662% 663\newbox\groupbox 664\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 665% 666\envdef\group{% 667 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 668 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 669 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 670 \fi 671 \startsavinginserts 672 % 673 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 674 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 675 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 676 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 677 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 678 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 679 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 680 \comment 681} 682% 683% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 684% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 685% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 686% above. But it's pretty close. 687\def\Egroup{% 688 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 689 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 690 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 691 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 692 \egroup % End the \vtop. 693 \addgroupbox 694 \prevdepth = \dimen1 695 \checkinserts 696} 697 698\def\addgroupbox{ 699 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 700 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 701 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 702 \dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 703 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 704 % group, force a page break. 705 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 706 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight 707 \page 708 \fi 709 \fi 710 \box\groupbox 711} 712 713% 714% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 715% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 716% 717\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 718group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 719where each line of input produces a line of output.} 720 721% @need space-in-mils 722% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 723 724\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 725 726\parseargdef\need{% 727 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 728 % paragraph. 729 \par 730 % 731 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 732 \dimen0 = #1\mil 733 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 734 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 735 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 736 % 737 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 738 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 739 % And a page break here is fine. 740 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 741 % 742 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 743 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 744 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 745 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 746 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 747 % 748 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 749 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 750 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 751 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 752 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 753 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 754 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 755 \penalty9999 756 % 757 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 758 \kern -#1\mil 759 % 760 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 761 \nobreak 762 \fi 763} 764 765% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 766 767\let\br = \par 768 769% @page forces the start of a new page. 770% 771\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 772 773% @exdent text.... 774% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 775 776% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 777% That's how much \exdent should take out. 778\newskip\exdentamount 779 780% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 781\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 782 783% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 784\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 785 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 786 787% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 788% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 789% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. 790% 791\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 792\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 793% 794\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 795 \nobreak 796 \kern-\strutdepth 797 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 798 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 799 \vss 800 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 801 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 802 \ifx#1l% 803 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 804 \else 805 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 806 \fi 807 \null 808 }% 809}} 810\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 811\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 812% 813% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 814% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 815% else use TEXT for both). 816% 817\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 818\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 819 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 820 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 821 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 822 \def\righttext{#2}% 823 \else 824 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 825 \def\righttext{#1}% 826 \fi 827 % 828 \ifodd\pageno 829 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 830 \else 831 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 832 \fi 833 \temp 834} 835 836% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 837% 838\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 839\def\includezzz#1{% 840 \pushthisfilestack 841 \def\thisfile{#1}% 842 {% 843 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 844 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 845 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 846 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% 847 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 848 % 849 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 850 % definitions, etc. 851 \expandafter 852 }\temp 853 \popthisfilestack 854} 855\def\filenamecatcodes{% 856 \catcode`\\=\other 857 \catcode`~=\other 858 \catcode`^=\other 859 \catcode`_=\other 860 \catcode`|=\other 861 \catcode`<=\other 862 \catcode`>=\other 863 \catcode`+=\other 864 \catcode`-=\other 865 \catcode`\`=\other 866 \catcode`\'=\other 867} 868 869\def\pushthisfilestack{% 870 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 871} 872\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 873 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 874} 875\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 876 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 877} 878 879\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 880\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 881 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 882% 883\def\thisfile{} 884 885% @center line 886% outputs that line, centered. 887% 888\parseargdef\center{% 889 \ifhmode 890 \let\centersub\centerH 891 \else 892 \let\centersub\centerV 893 \fi 894 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 895 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case 896} 897\def\centerH#1{{% 898 \hfil\break 899 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 900 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 901 \line{#1}% 902 \break 903}} 904% 905\newcount\centerpenalty 906\def\centerV#1{% 907 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if 908 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe 909 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still 910 % prevent a page break here. 911 \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty 912 \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi 913 \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi 914 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}% 915} 916 917% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 918% 919\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 920 921% @comment ...line which is ignored... 922% @c is the same as @comment 923% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 924 925 926\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active% 927\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 928\cxxx} 929{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 930% 931\let\comment\c 932 933% @paragraphindent NCHARS 934% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 935% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 936% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 937% 938\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 939\def\noneword{none} 940% 941\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 942 \def\temp{#1}% 943 \ifx\temp\asisword 944 \else 945 \ifx\temp\noneword 946 \defaultparindent = 0pt 947 \else 948 \defaultparindent = #1em 949 \fi 950 \fi 951 \parindent = \defaultparindent 952} 953 954% @exampleindent NCHARS 955% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 956% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 957% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 958\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 959 \def\temp{#1}% 960 \ifx\temp\asisword 961 \else 962 \ifx\temp\noneword 963 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 964 \else 965 \lispnarrowing = #1em 966 \fi 967 \fi 968} 969 970% @firstparagraphindent WORD 971% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 972% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 973% paragraphs. 974% 975% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 976% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 977% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 978% By default, we suppress indentation. 979% 980\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 981\def\insertword{insert} 982% 983\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 984 \def\temp{#1}% 985 \ifx\temp\noneword 986 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 987 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 988 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 989 \else 990 \errhelp = \EMsimple 991 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 992 \fi\fi 993} 994 995% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 996% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 997% 998% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 999% paragraph. 1000% 1001\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 1002 \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}% 1003 \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}% 1004 \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}% 1005} 1006% 1007\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1008 \global\let\indent = \ptexindent 1009 \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent 1010 \global\everypar = {}% 1011} 1012 1013 1014% @refill is a no-op. 1015\let\refill=\relax 1016 1017% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored 1018\let\setfilename=\comment 1019 1020% @bye. 1021\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1022 1023 1024\message{pdf,} 1025% adobe `portable' document format 1026\newcount\tempnum 1027\newcount\lnkcount 1028\newtoks\filename 1029\newcount\filenamelength 1030\newcount\pgn 1031\newtoks\toksA 1032\newtoks\toksB 1033\newtoks\toksC 1034\newtoks\toksD 1035\newbox\boxA 1036\newbox\boxB 1037\newcount\countA 1038\newif\ifpdf 1039\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1040 1041% 1042% For LuaTeX 1043% 1044 1045\newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname 1046\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc. 1047 1048\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1049\else 1050 % Use Unicode destination names 1051 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1052 % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8 1053 \begingroup 1054 \catcode`\%=12 1055 \directlua{ 1056 function UTF16oct(str) 1057 tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377') 1058 for c in string.utfvalues(str) do 1059 if c < 0x10000 then 1060 tex.sprint( 1061 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1062 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1063 (c / 256), (c % 256))) 1064 else 1065 c = c - 0x10000 1066 local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800 1067 local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00 1068 tex.sprint( 1069 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1070 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1071 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1072 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1073 (c_hi / 256), (c_hi % 256), 1074 (c_lo / 256), (c_lo % 256))) 1075 end 1076 end 1077 end 1078 } 1079 \endgroup 1080 \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1081 % Escape PDF strings without converting 1082 \begingroup 1083 \directlua{ 1084 function PDFescstr(str) 1085 for c in string.bytes(str) do 1086 if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then 1087 tex.sprint( 1088 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1089 c)) 1090 else 1091 tex.sprint(string.char(c)) 1092 end 1093 end 1094 end 1095 } 1096 \endgroup 1097 \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1098 \ifnum\luatexversion>84 1099 % For LuaTeX >= 0.85 1100 \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest} 1101 \let\pdfoutput\outputmode 1102 \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal} 1103 \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog} 1104 \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax} 1105 \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource 1106 \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource 1107 \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex 1108 \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax} 1109 \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline} 1110 \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink} 1111 \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr} 1112 \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj} 1113 \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax} 1114 \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth 1115 \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight 1116 \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin} 1117 \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin} 1118 \fi 1119\fi 1120 1121% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1122% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. 1123\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined 1124\else 1125 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1126 \else 1127 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1128 \else 1129 \pdftrue 1130 \fi 1131 \fi 1132\fi 1133 1134% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1135% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1136% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1137% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1138% 1139% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and 1140% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user 1141% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1142% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to 1143% do this reliably, so we use it. 1144 1145% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, 1146% which we \xdef. 1147\def\txiescapepdf#1{% 1148 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined 1149 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? 1150 % Many times it won't matter. 1151 \xdef#1{#1}% 1152 \else 1153 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, 1154 % backslashes, and other special chars. 1155 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% 1156 \fi 1157} 1158\def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{% 1159 \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined 1160 % No UTF-16 converting macro available. 1161 \txiescapepdf{#1}% 1162 \else 1163 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}% 1164 \fi 1165} 1166 1167\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1168with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1169be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1170output) for that.)} 1171 1172\ifpdf 1173 % 1174 % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex, 1175 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a 1176 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead 1177 % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as 1178 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use 1179 % black by default, though. 1180 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1181 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1182 % 1183 % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); 1184 % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). 1185 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} 1186 % 1187 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1188 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1189 \def\setcolor#1{% 1190 \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1191 \domark 1192 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1193 } 1194 % 1195 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1196 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1197 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1198 \def\currentcolordefs{} 1199 % 1200 \def\makefootline{% 1201 \baselineskip24pt 1202 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1203 } 1204 % 1205 \def\makeheadline{% 1206 \vbox to 0pt{% 1207 \vskip-22.5pt 1208 \line{% 1209 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1210 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1211 \getcolormarks 1212 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1213 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1214 }% 1215 \vss 1216 }% 1217 \nointerlineskip 1218 } 1219 % 1220 % 1221 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1222 % 1223 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1224 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1225 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1226 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1227 % 1228 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1229 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1230 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1231 % bitmap. 1232 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1233 \begingroup 1234 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1235 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1236 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1237 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1238 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1239 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1240 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1241 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1242 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1243 \fi 1244 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1245 \fi 1246 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1247 \fi 1248 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1249 \fi 1250 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1251 \fi 1252 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1253 \fi 1254 \closein 1 1255 \endgroup 1256 % 1257 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1258 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1259 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1260 \immediate\pdfimage 1261 \else 1262 \immediate\pdfximage 1263 \fi 1264 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi 1265 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi 1266 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1267 #1.\pdfimgext 1268 \else 1269 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1270 \fi 1271 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1272 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1273 \fi} 1274 % 1275 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1276 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1277 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1278 \indexnofonts 1279 \makevalueexpandable 1280 \turnoffactive 1281 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1282 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1283 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1284 % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode. 1285 \else 1286 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1287 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1288 \else 1289 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1290 \passthroughcharsfalse 1291 \fi 1292 \fi 1293 \else 1294 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1295 \passthroughcharsfalse 1296 \fi 1297 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1298 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1299 }} 1300 % 1301 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1302 \indexnofonts 1303 \makevalueexpandable 1304 \turnoffactive 1305 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1306 % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark 1307 % strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for 1308 % the "PDFDocEncoding". 1309 \passthroughcharstrue 1310 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1311 % LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode 1312 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1313 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1314 \else 1315 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1316 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1317 % For pdfTeX with UTF-8. 1318 % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings, 1319 % but the code for this isn't done yet. 1320 % Use ASCII approximations. 1321 \passthroughcharsfalse 1322 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1323 \else 1324 % For LuaTeX with UTF-8. 1325 % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts. 1326 \passthroughcharstrue 1327 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1328 \fi 1329 \else 1330 % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings. 1331 % Use ASCII approximations. 1332 \passthroughcharsfalse 1333 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1334 \fi 1335 \fi 1336 % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16 1337 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1338 \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext 1339 }} 1340 % 1341 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1342 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1343 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1344 } 1345 % 1346 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1347 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1348 % 1349 % by default, use black for everything. 1350 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1351 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1352 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1353 % 1354 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1355 % come from Petr Olsak 1356 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1357 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1358 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1359 \advance\tempnum by 1 1360 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1361 % 1362 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1363 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1364 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1365 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1366 % #4 is the page number 1367 % 1368 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1369 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1370 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1371 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1372 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1373 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1374 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1375 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1376 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1377 \fi 1378 % 1379 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1380 } 1381 % 1382 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1383 \begingroup 1384 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1385 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1386 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1387 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1388 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1389 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1390 }% 1391 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1392 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1393 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1394 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1395 }% 1396 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1397 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1398 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1399 }% 1400 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1401 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1402 }% 1403 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1404 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1405 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1406 % 1407 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1408 % al. a second time, below. 1409 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1410 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1411 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1412 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1413 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1414 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1415 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1416 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1417 \readdatafile{toc}% 1418 % 1419 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1420 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1421 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1422 % 1423 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1424 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1425 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1426 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1427 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1428 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1429 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1430 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1431 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1432 % 1433 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1434 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1435 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1436 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1437 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1438 % 1439 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1440 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too 1441 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents 1442 % we use for the index sort strings. 1443 % 1444 \indexnofonts 1445 \setupdatafile 1446 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1447 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1448 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1449 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1450 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1451 \input \tocreadfilename 1452 \endgroup 1453 } 1454 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1455 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1456 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1457 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1458 ] 1459 % 1460 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1461 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1462 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1463 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1464 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1465 \fi 1466 \nextsp} 1467 \def\getfilename#1{% 1468 \filenamelength=0 1469 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1470 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1471 \edef\temp{#1}% 1472 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1473 } 1474 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1475 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1476 \else 1477 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1478 \fi 1479 % make a live url in pdf output. 1480 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1481 \begingroup 1482 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1483 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1484 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1485 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1486 % 1487 \normalturnoffactive 1488 \def\@{@}% 1489 \let\/=\empty 1490 \makevalueexpandable 1491 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1492 % special-casing \var here? 1493 \def\var##1{##1}% 1494 % 1495 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1496 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1497 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1498 \endgroup} 1499 % \pdfgettoks - Surround page numbers in #1 with @pdflink. #1 may 1500 % be a simple number, or a list of numbers in the case of an index 1501 % entry. 1502 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1503 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1504 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1505 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1506 \def\maketoks{% 1507 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1508 \ifx\first0\adn0 1509 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1510 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1511 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1512 \else 1513 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1514 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1515 \let\next=\maketoks 1516 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1517 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1518 \fi 1519 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1520 \next} 1521 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1522 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1523 \def\pdflink#1{% 1524 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1525 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1526 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1527\else 1528 % non-pdf mode 1529 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1530 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1531 \let\endlink = \relax 1532 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1533 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1534 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1535\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1536 1537% 1538% For XeTeX 1539% 1540\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 1541\else 1542 % 1543 % XeTeX version check 1544 % 1545 \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1 1546 % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307. 1547 % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941). 1548 % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special 1549 % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 1550 \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010} 1551 % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+. 1552 % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF. 1553 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1554 \else 1555 % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the 1556 % `dvipdfmx:config' special. 1557 % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement, 1558 % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary. 1559 % 1560 % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF 1561 % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue. 1562 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1563 \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse 1564 \fi 1565 % 1566 % Color support 1567 % 1568 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1569 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1570 % 1571 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}} 1572 % 1573 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1574 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1575 \def\setcolor#1{% 1576 \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1577 \domark 1578 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1579 } 1580 % 1581 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1582 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1583 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1584 \def\currentcolordefs{} 1585 % 1586 \def\makefootline{% 1587 \baselineskip24pt 1588 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1589 } 1590 % 1591 \def\makeheadline{% 1592 \vbox to 0pt{% 1593 \vskip-22.5pt 1594 \line{% 1595 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1596 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1597 \getcolormarks 1598 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1599 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1600 }% 1601 \vss 1602 }% 1603 \nointerlineskip 1604 } 1605 % 1606 % PDF outline support 1607 % 1608 % Emulate pdfTeX primitive 1609 \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{% 1610 \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}% 1611 } 1612 % 1613 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1614 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1615 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1616 \indexnofonts 1617 \makevalueexpandable 1618 \turnoffactive 1619 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1620 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1621 \else 1622 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1623 \passthroughcharsfalse 1624 \fi 1625 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1626 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1627 }} 1628 % 1629 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1630 \turnoffactive 1631 % Always use Unicode characters in title texts. 1632 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1633 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16. 1634 % So we do not convert. 1635 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext 1636 }} 1637 % 1638 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1639 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1640 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1641 } 1642 % 1643 % by default, use black for everything. 1644 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1645 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1646 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1647 % 1648 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1649 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1650 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1651 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1652 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1653 \fi 1654 % 1655 \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A 1656 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }% 1657 } 1658 % 1659 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1660 \begingroup 1661 % 1662 % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary. 1663 % Therefore, we read toc only once. 1664 % 1665 % We use node names as destinations. 1666 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1667 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1668 \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% 1669 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1670 \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}% 1671 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1672 \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}% 1673 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1674 \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}% 1675 % 1676 \let\appentry\numchapentry% 1677 \let\appsecentry\numsecentry% 1678 \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1679 \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1680 \let\unnchapentry\numchapentry% 1681 \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry% 1682 \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1683 \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1684 % 1685 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16. 1686 % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered. 1687 % 1688 \indexnofonts 1689 \setupdatafile 1690 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1691 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1692 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1693 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1694 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1695 \input \tocreadfilename 1696 \endgroup 1697 } 1698 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1699 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1700 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1701 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1702 ] 1703 1704 \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> } 1705 % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary 1706 % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it. 1707 % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315, 1708 % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings. 1709 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1710% 1711 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1712 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1713 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1714 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1715 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1716 \fi 1717 \nextsp} 1718 \def\getfilename#1{% 1719 \filenamelength=0 1720 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1721 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1722 \edef\temp{#1}% 1723 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1724 } 1725 % make a live url in pdf output. 1726 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1727 \begingroup 1728 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1729 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1730 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1731 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1732 % 1733 \normalturnoffactive 1734 \def\@{@}% 1735 \let\/=\empty 1736 \makevalueexpandable 1737 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1738 % special-casing \var here? 1739 \def\var##1{##1}% 1740 % 1741 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1742 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1743 /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}% 1744 \endgroup} 1745 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}} 1746 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1747 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1748 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1749 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1750 \def\maketoks{% 1751 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1752 \ifx\first0\adn0 1753 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1754 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1755 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1756 \else 1757 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1758 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1759 \let\next=\maketoks 1760 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1761 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1762 \fi 1763 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1764 \next} 1765 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1766 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1767 \def\pdflink#1{% 1768 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1769 /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}% 1770 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1771 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1772% 1773 % 1774 % @image support 1775 % 1776 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1777 \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{% 1778 \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1779 \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1780 % 1781 % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1782 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1783 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1784 % bitmap. 1785 \let\xeteximgext=\empty 1786 \begingroup 1787 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1788 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1789 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1790 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1791 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1792 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1793 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}% 1794 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}% 1795 \fi 1796 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}% 1797 \fi 1798 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}% 1799 \fi 1800 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}% 1801 \fi 1802 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}% 1803 \fi 1804 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}% 1805 \fi 1806 \closein 1 1807 \endgroup 1808 % 1809 \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}% 1810 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1811 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1812 \else 1813 \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}% 1814 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1815 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1816 \else 1817 \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1818 \fi 1819 \fi 1820 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi 1821 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax 1822 } 1823\fi 1824 1825 1826% 1827\message{fonts,} 1828 1829% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1830% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1831% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1832% 1833\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1834\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1835\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1836% 1837% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1838\def\baselinefactor{1} 1839% 1840\newdimen\textleading 1841\def\setleading#1{% 1842 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1843 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1844 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1845 \normalbaselines 1846 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1847 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1848 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1849 }% 1850} 1851 1852% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1853% 1854% do nothing with this by default. 1855\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1856\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1857\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1858 1859% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1860% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1861% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1862\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else 1863 \begingroup 1864 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1865 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1866%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1867%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1868%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1869%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1870%%Version: 1.000 1871%%EndComments 1872/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 187312 dict begin 1874begincmap 1875/CIDSystemInfo 1876<< /Registry (TeX) 1877/Ordering (OT1) 1878/Supplement 0 1879>> def 1880/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1881/CMapType 2 def 18821 begincodespacerange 1883<00> <7F> 1884endcodespacerange 18858 beginbfrange 1886<00> <01> <0393> 1887<09> <0A> <03A8> 1888<23> <26> <0023> 1889<28> <3B> <0028> 1890<3F> <5B> <003F> 1891<5D> <5E> <005D> 1892<61> <7A> <0061> 1893<7B> <7C> <2013> 1894endbfrange 189540 beginbfchar 1896<02> <0398> 1897<03> <039B> 1898<04> <039E> 1899<05> <03A0> 1900<06> <03A3> 1901<07> <03D2> 1902<08> <03A6> 1903<0B> <00660066> 1904<0C> <00660069> 1905<0D> <0066006C> 1906<0E> <006600660069> 1907<0F> <00660066006C> 1908<10> <0131> 1909<11> <0237> 1910<12> <0060> 1911<13> <00B4> 1912<14> <02C7> 1913<15> <02D8> 1914<16> <00AF> 1915<17> <02DA> 1916<18> <00B8> 1917<19> <00DF> 1918<1A> <00E6> 1919<1B> <0153> 1920<1C> <00F8> 1921<1D> <00C6> 1922<1E> <0152> 1923<1F> <00D8> 1924<21> <0021> 1925<22> <201D> 1926<27> <2019> 1927<3C> <00A1> 1928<3D> <003D> 1929<3E> <00BF> 1930<5C> <201C> 1931<5F> <02D9> 1932<60> <2018> 1933<7D> <02DD> 1934<7E> <007E> 1935<7F> <00A8> 1936endbfchar 1937endcmap 1938CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1939end 1940end 1941%%EndResource 1942%%EOF 1943 }\endgroup 1944 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 1945 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1946 }% 1947% 1948% \cmapOT1IT 1949 \begingroup 1950 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1951 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1952%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1953%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1954%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 1955%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 1956%%Version: 1.000 1957%%EndComments 1958/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 195912 dict begin 1960begincmap 1961/CIDSystemInfo 1962<< /Registry (TeX) 1963/Ordering (OT1IT) 1964/Supplement 0 1965>> def 1966/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 1967/CMapType 2 def 19681 begincodespacerange 1969<00> <7F> 1970endcodespacerange 19718 beginbfrange 1972<00> <01> <0393> 1973<09> <0A> <03A8> 1974<25> <26> <0025> 1975<28> <3B> <0028> 1976<3F> <5B> <003F> 1977<5D> <5E> <005D> 1978<61> <7A> <0061> 1979<7B> <7C> <2013> 1980endbfrange 198142 beginbfchar 1982<02> <0398> 1983<03> <039B> 1984<04> <039E> 1985<05> <03A0> 1986<06> <03A3> 1987<07> <03D2> 1988<08> <03A6> 1989<0B> <00660066> 1990<0C> <00660069> 1991<0D> <0066006C> 1992<0E> <006600660069> 1993<0F> <00660066006C> 1994<10> <0131> 1995<11> <0237> 1996<12> <0060> 1997<13> <00B4> 1998<14> <02C7> 1999<15> <02D8> 2000<16> <00AF> 2001<17> <02DA> 2002<18> <00B8> 2003<19> <00DF> 2004<1A> <00E6> 2005<1B> <0153> 2006<1C> <00F8> 2007<1D> <00C6> 2008<1E> <0152> 2009<1F> <00D8> 2010<21> <0021> 2011<22> <201D> 2012<23> <0023> 2013<24> <00A3> 2014<27> <2019> 2015<3C> <00A1> 2016<3D> <003D> 2017<3E> <00BF> 2018<5C> <201C> 2019<5F> <02D9> 2020<60> <2018> 2021<7D> <02DD> 2022<7E> <007E> 2023<7F> <00A8> 2024endbfchar 2025endcmap 2026CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2027end 2028end 2029%%EndResource 2030%%EOF 2031 }\endgroup 2032 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 2033 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2034 }% 2035% 2036% \cmapOT1TT 2037 \begingroup 2038 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 2039 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 2040%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2041%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2042%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 2043%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 2044%%Version: 1.000 2045%%EndComments 2046/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 204712 dict begin 2048begincmap 2049/CIDSystemInfo 2050<< /Registry (TeX) 2051/Ordering (OT1TT) 2052/Supplement 0 2053>> def 2054/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 2055/CMapType 2 def 20561 begincodespacerange 2057<00> <7F> 2058endcodespacerange 20595 beginbfrange 2060<00> <01> <0393> 2061<09> <0A> <03A8> 2062<21> <26> <0021> 2063<28> <5F> <0028> 2064<61> <7E> <0061> 2065endbfrange 206632 beginbfchar 2067<02> <0398> 2068<03> <039B> 2069<04> <039E> 2070<05> <03A0> 2071<06> <03A3> 2072<07> <03D2> 2073<08> <03A6> 2074<0B> <2191> 2075<0C> <2193> 2076<0D> <0027> 2077<0E> <00A1> 2078<0F> <00BF> 2079<10> <0131> 2080<11> <0237> 2081<12> <0060> 2082<13> <00B4> 2083<14> <02C7> 2084<15> <02D8> 2085<16> <00AF> 2086<17> <02DA> 2087<18> <00B8> 2088<19> <00DF> 2089<1A> <00E6> 2090<1B> <0153> 2091<1C> <00F8> 2092<1D> <00C6> 2093<1E> <0152> 2094<1F> <00D8> 2095<20> <2423> 2096<27> <2019> 2097<60> <2018> 2098<7F> <00A8> 2099endbfchar 2100endcmap 2101CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2102end 2103end 2104%%EndResource 2105%%EOF 2106 }\endgroup 2107 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 2108 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2109 }% 2110\fi\fi 2111 2112 2113% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2. 2114% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 2115% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit). 2116% Example: 2117% #1 = \textrm 2118% #2 = \rmshape 2119% #3 = 10 2120% #4 = \mainmagstep 2121% #5 = OT1 2122% 2123\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 2124 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 2125 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 2126} 2127% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 2128\let\cmap\gobble 2129% 2130% (end of cmaps) 2131 2132% Use cm as the default font prefix. 2133% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 2134% before you read in texinfo.tex. 2135\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined 2136\def\fontprefix{cm} 2137\fi 2138% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 2139\def\rmshape{r} 2140\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold 2141\def\bfshape{b} 2142\def\bxshape{bx} 2143\def\ttshape{tt} 2144\def\ttbshape{tt} 2145\def\ttslshape{sltt} 2146\def\itshape{ti} 2147\def\itbshape{bxti} 2148\def\slshape{sl} 2149\def\slbshape{bxsl} 2150\def\sfshape{ss} 2151\def\sfbshape{ss} 2152\def\scshape{csc} 2153\def\scbshape{csc} 2154 2155% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.) 2156% 2157\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 2158% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 2159\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 2160\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 2161\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2162\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2163\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2164\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2165\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2166\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2167\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2168\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2169\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2170\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2171\def\textecsize{1095} 2172 2173% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2174\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2175\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2176\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2177\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2178\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2179\let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf} 2180 2181% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2182\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2183\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2184\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2185\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2186\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2187\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2188\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2189\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2190\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2191\font\smalli=cmmi9 2192\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2193\def\smallecsize{0900} 2194 2195% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2196\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2197\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2198\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2199\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2200\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2201\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2202\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2203\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2204\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2205\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2206\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2207\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2208 2209% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2210\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2211\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2212\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2213\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2214\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2215\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2216\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2217\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2218\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2219\font\seveni=cmmi7 2220\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2221\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2222 2223% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2224\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2225\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2226\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2227\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2228\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2229\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2230\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2231\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2232\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2233\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2234\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2235\def\titleecsize{2074} 2236 2237% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2238\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2239\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2240\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2241\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2242\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2243\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2244\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2245\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2246\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2247\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2248\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2249\def\chapecsize{1728} 2250 2251% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2252\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2253\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2254\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2255\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2256\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2257\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2258\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2259\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2260\let\secbf\secrm 2261\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2262\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2263\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2264\def\sececsize{1440} 2265 2266% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2267\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2268\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2269\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2270\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2271\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2272\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2273\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2274\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2275\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2276\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2277\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2278\def\ssececsize{1200} 2279 2280% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt). 2281\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2282\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2283\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2284\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2285\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2286\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2287\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2288\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2289\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2290\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2291\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2292\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2293 2294\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM 2295\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2296\rm 2297} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi 2298 2299 2300% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2301% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2302% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2303% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2304% 2305\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2306% Text fonts (10pt). 2307\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2308\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2309\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2310\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2311\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2312\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2313\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2314\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2315\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2316\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2317\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2318\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2319\def\textecsize{1000} 2320 2321% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2322\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2323\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2324\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2325\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2326\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2327\let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf} 2328 2329% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2330\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2331\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2332\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2333\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2334\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2335\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2336\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2337\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2338\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2339\font\smalli=cmmi9 2340\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2341\def\smallecsize{0900} 2342 2343% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2344\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2345\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2346\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2347\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2348\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2349\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2350\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2351\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2352\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2353\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2354\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2355\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2356 2357% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2358\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2359\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2360\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2361\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2362\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2363\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2364\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2365\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2366\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2367\font\seveni=cmmi7 2368\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2369\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2370 2371% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2372\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2373\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2374\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2375\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2376\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2377\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2378\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2379\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2380\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2381\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2382\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2383\def\titleecsize{2074} 2384 2385% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2386\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2387\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2388\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2389\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2390\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2391\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2392\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2393\let\chapbf\chaprm 2394\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2395\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2396\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2397\def\chapecsize{1440} 2398 2399% Section fonts (12pt). 2400\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2401\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2402\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2403\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2404\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2405\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2406\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2407\let\secbf\secrm 2408\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2409\font\seci=cmmi12 2410\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2411\def\sececsize{1200} 2412 2413% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2414\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2415\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2416\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2417\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2418\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2419\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2420\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2421\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2422\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2423\font\sseci=cmmi10 2424\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2425\def\ssececsize{1000} 2426 2427% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt). 2428\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2429\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2430\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2431\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2432\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2433\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2434\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2435\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2436\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2437\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2438\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2439\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2440 2441\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs 2442\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM 2443\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2444\rm 2445} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex 2446 2447% Fonts for short table of contents. 2448\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2449\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2450\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2451\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2452 2453 2454% We provide the user-level command 2455% @fonttextsize 10 2456% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2457% 2458\def\xiword{11} 2459\def\xword{10} 2460\def\xwordpt{10pt} 2461% 2462\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2463 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2464 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2465 % 2466 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2467 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2468 % 2469 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2470 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2471 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2472 \else 2473 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2474 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2475 \fi\fi 2476 \endgroup 2477} 2478 2479% 2480% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 2481% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 2482% italics, not bold italics. 2483% 2484\def\setfontstyle#1{% 2485 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 2486 \csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font 2487} 2488 2489\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 2490\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 2491\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 2492\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 2493\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 2494 2495% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 2496% So we set up a \sf. 2497\newfam\sffam 2498\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 2499 2500% We don't need math for this font style. 2501\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 2502 2503 2504% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2505% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. 2506% We don't bother to reset \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need. 2507% 2508\def\resetmathfonts{% 2509 \textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont 2510 \textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont 2511 \textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont 2512 % 2513 % Fonts for superscript. Note that the 7pt fonts are used regardless 2514 % of the current font size. 2515 \scriptfont0=\sevenrm \scriptfont1=\seveni \scriptfont2=\sevensy 2516 \scriptfont\itfam=\sevenit \scriptfont\slfam=\sevensl 2517 \scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf \scriptfont\ttfam=\seventt 2518 \scriptfont\sffam=\sevensf 2519} 2520 2521% 2522 2523% The font-changing commands (all called \...fonts) redefine the meanings 2524% of \STYLEfont, instead of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs 2525% to also set the current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) 2526% commands hardwire \STYLEfont to set the current font. 2527% 2528% The fonts used for \ifont are for "math italics" (\itfont is for italics 2529% in regular text). \syfont is also used in math mode only. 2530% 2531% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2532% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used 2533% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2534% 2535% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2536% 2537 2538\def\assignfonts#1{% 2539 \expandafter\let\expandafter\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname 2540 \expandafter\let\expandafter\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname 2541 \expandafter\let\expandafter\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname 2542 \expandafter\let\expandafter\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname 2543 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname 2544 \expandafter\let\expandafter\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname 2545 \expandafter\let\expandafter\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname 2546 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname 2547 \expandafter\let\expandafter\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname 2548 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname 2549} 2550 2551\newif\ifrmisbold 2552 2553% Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size 2554% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for 2555% normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size. 2556\def\switchtolllsize{% 2557 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}% 2558 \ifrmisbold 2559 \let\rmfont\bffont 2560 \fi 2561 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2562}% 2563 2564\def\switchtolsize{% 2565 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}% 2566 \ifrmisbold 2567 \let\rmfont\bffont 2568 \fi 2569 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2570}% 2571 2572\def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{% 2573\expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{% 2574 \def\curfontsize{#1}% 2575 \def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}% 2576 \csname rmisbold#5\endcsname 2577 \assignfonts{#1}% 2578 \resetmathfonts 2579 \setleading{#4}% 2580}} 2581 2582\definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false} 2583\definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true} 2584\definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true} 2585\definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true} 2586\definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true} 2587\definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2588\definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2589\definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false} 2590 2591\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 2592\let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2593\let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2594 2595% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2596\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2597\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2598 2599% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2600\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2601 2602% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2603% can fit this many characters: 2604% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2605% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2606% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2607% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2608% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2609% 2610% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2611% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2612% --karl, 24jan03. 2613 2614% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2615% 2616\definetextfontsizexi 2617 2618 2619\message{markup,} 2620 2621% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2622% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2623% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2624% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2625% 2626\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2627 2628% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will 2629% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. 2630% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost 2631% style. 2632 2633\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty 2634 2635\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% 2636 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% 2637 \markupstylesetup 2638} 2639 2640\let\markupstylesetup\empty 2641 2642\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% 2643 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup 2644 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% 2645 \def#1% 2646} 2647 2648% Markup style setup for left and right quotes. 2649\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% 2650 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2651 \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2652 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi 2653} 2654 2655\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% 2656 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2657 \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2658 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi 2659} 2660 2661{ 2662\catcode`\'=\active 2663\catcode`\`=\active 2664 2665\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} 2666\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} 2667 2668\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} 2669\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} 2670} 2671 2672\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft 2673\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright 2674% 2675\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft 2676\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright 2677% 2678\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft 2679\let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright 2680% 2681\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft 2682\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright 2683% 2684\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft 2685\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright 2686% 2687\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft 2688\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright 2689 2690% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe 2691% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). 2692% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it 2693% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the 2694% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. 2695% 2696\def\codequoteright{% 2697 \ifmonospace 2698 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2699 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2700 '% 2701 \else \char'15 \fi 2702 \else \char'15 \fi 2703 \else 2704 '% 2705 \fi 2706} 2707% 2708% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 2709% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 2710% the code environments to do likewise. 2711% 2712\def\codequoteleft{% 2713 \ifmonospace 2714 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2715 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2716 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 2717 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2718 \relax`% 2719 \else \char'22 \fi 2720 \else \char'22 \fi 2721 \else 2722 \relax`% 2723 \fi 2724} 2725 2726% Commands to set the quote options. 2727% 2728\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% 2729 \def\temp{#1}% 2730 \ifx\temp\onword 2731 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2732 = t% 2733 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2734 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2735 = \relax 2736 \else 2737 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2738 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2739 \fi\fi 2740} 2741% 2742\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% 2743 \def\temp{#1}% 2744 \ifx\temp\onword 2745 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2746 = t% 2747 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2748 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2749 = \relax 2750 \else 2751 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2752 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2753 \fi\fi 2754} 2755 2756% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2757\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} 2758 2759% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2760\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2761 2762% Font commands. 2763 2764% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. 2765% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, 2766% and 2) do not add an italic correction. 2767\def\dosmartslant#1#2{% 2768 \ifusingtt 2769 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% 2770 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% 2771 \next 2772} 2773\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} 2774\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} 2775 2776% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following 2777% character) is such as not to need one. 2778\def\smartitaliccorrection{% 2779 \ifx\next,% 2780 \else\ifx\next-% 2781 \else\ifx\next.% 2782 \else\ifx\next\.% 2783 \else\ifx\next\comma% 2784 \else\ptexslash 2785 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 2786 \aftersmartic 2787} 2788 2789% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns. 2790\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} 2791 2792% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2793% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2794\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} 2795 2796\def\aftersmartic{} 2797\def\var#1{% 2798 \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic 2799 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% 2800 \smartslanted{#1}% 2801} 2802 2803\let\i=\smartitalic 2804\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2805\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2806\let\emph=\smartitalic 2807 2808% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2809\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2810\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2811\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2812 2813% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. 2814\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2815\let\strong=\b 2816 2817% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2818\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2819 2820% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2821% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2822% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2823% 2824\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2825\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2826 2827% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2828% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2829% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2830% 2831\catcode`@=11 2832 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2833 \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m 2834 \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m 2835 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2836 } 2837 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2838 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2839 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2840 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2841 } 2842\catcode`@=\other 2843\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2844 2845% @t, explicit typewriter. 2846\def\t#1{% 2847 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2848 \null 2849} 2850 2851% @samp. 2852\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} 2853 2854% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes. 2855\let\indicateurl=\samp 2856 2857% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same 2858% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc. 2859% This is a subroutine for that. 2860\def\tclose#1{% 2861 {% 2862 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2863 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2864 % 2865 % Switch to typewriter. 2866 \tt 2867 % 2868 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2869 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2870 % 2871 % Turn off hyphenation. 2872 \nohyphenation 2873 % 2874 \rawbackslash 2875 \plainfrenchspacing 2876 #1% 2877 }% 2878 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 2879} 2880 2881% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2882% (But see \codedashfinish below.) 2883% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2884% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2885% 2886% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2887% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2888% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2889% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms. 2890{ 2891 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2892 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2893 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions 2894 % 2895 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2896 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 2897 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. 2898 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2899 \ifallowcodebreaks 2900 \let-\codedash 2901 \let_\codeunder 2902 \else 2903 \let-\normaldash 2904 \let_\realunder 2905 \fi 2906 % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break 2907 % after the hyphen. 2908 \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash 2909 % 2910 \codex 2911 } 2912 % 2913 \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish} 2914 \gdef\codedashfinish{% 2915 \normaldash % always output the dash character itself. 2916 % 2917 % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless 2918 % (a) the next character is a -, or 2919 % (b) the preceding character is a -. 2920 % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -. 2921 % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b. 2922 \ifx\next\codedash \else 2923 \ifx\codedashprev\codedash 2924 \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi 2925 \fi 2926 % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a 2927 % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}. 2928 \global\let\codedashprev= \next 2929 } 2930} 2931\def\normaldash{-} 2932% 2933\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2934 2935\def\codeunder{% 2936 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2937 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2938 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2939 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2940 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2941 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2942 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2943 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2944 {\_}% 2945} 2946 2947% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2948% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad. 2949% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at - 2950% and _ on and off. 2951% 2952\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2953 2954\def\keywordtrue{true} 2955\def\keywordfalse{false} 2956 2957\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2958 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2959 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2960 \allowcodebreakstrue 2961 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2962 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2963 \else 2964 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2965 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% 2966 \fi\fi 2967} 2968 2969% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary, 2970% so use \code rather than \samp. 2971\let\command=\code 2972\let\env=\code 2973\let\file=\code 2974\let\option=\code 2975 2976% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional 2977% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and 2978% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in 2979% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. 2980 2981% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second 2982% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target). 2983\newif\ifurefurlonlylink 2984 2985% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected 2986% places within the url. (There used to be another version, which 2987% didn't support automatic breaking.) 2988\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} 2989\let\uref=\urefbreak 2990% 2991\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} 2992\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example 2993 \unsepspaces 2994 \pdfurl{#1}% 2995 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2996 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2997 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2998 \else 2999 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg 3000 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 3001 \ifpdf 3002 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 3003 \ifurefurlonlylink 3004 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3005 \unhbox0 3006 \else 3007 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3008 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3009 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3010 \fi 3011 \else 3012 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 3013 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url 3014 \else 3015 % For XeTeX 3016 \ifurefurlonlylink 3017 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3018 \unhbox0 3019 \else 3020 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3021 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3022 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3023 \fi 3024 \fi 3025 \fi 3026 \else 3027 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it 3028 \fi 3029 \fi 3030 \endlink 3031\endgroup} 3032 3033% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). 3034\def\urefcatcodes{% 3035 \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active 3036 \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active 3037 \catcode`\/=\active 3038} 3039{ 3040 \urefcatcodes 3041 % 3042 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup 3043 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 3044 \urefcatcodes 3045 \let&\urefcodeamp 3046 \let.\urefcodedot 3047 \let#\urefcodehash 3048 \let?\urefcodequest 3049 \let/\urefcodeslash 3050 \codex 3051 } 3052 % 3053 % By default, they are just regular characters. 3054 \global\def&{\normalamp} 3055 \global\def.{\normaldot} 3056 \global\def#{\normalhash} 3057 \global\def?{\normalquest} 3058 \global\def/{\normalslash} 3059} 3060 3061\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprebreak \&\urefpostbreak} 3062\def\urefcodedot{\urefprebreak .\urefpostbreak} 3063\def\urefcodehash{\urefprebreak \#\urefpostbreak} 3064\def\urefcodequest{\urefprebreak ?\urefpostbreak} 3065\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} 3066{ 3067 \catcode`\/=\active 3068 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% 3069 \urefprebreak \slashChar 3070 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of 3071 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. 3072 \ifx\next/\else \urefpostbreak \fi 3073 } 3074} 3075 3076% By default we'll break after the special characters, but some people like to 3077% break before the special chars, so allow that. Also allow no breaking at 3078% all, for manual control. 3079% 3080\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% 3081 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3082 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone 3083 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3084 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore 3085 \def\urefprebreak{\urefallowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3086 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter 3087 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\urefallowbreak} 3088 \else 3089 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3090 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3091 \fi\fi\fi 3092} 3093\def\wordafter{after} 3094\def\wordbefore{before} 3095\def\wordnone{none} 3096 3097% Allow a ragged right output to aid breaking long URL's. Putting stretch in 3098% between characters of the URL doesn't look good. 3099\def\urefallowbreak{% 3100 \hskip 0pt plus 1fil\relax 3101 \allowbreak 3102 \hskip 0pt plus -1fil\relax 3103} 3104 3105\urefbreakstyle after 3106 3107% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 3108% 3109\let\url=\uref 3110 3111% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 3112% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 3113% 3114%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 3115\ifpdf 3116 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3117 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3118 \unsepspaces 3119 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3120 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3121 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3122 \endlink 3123 \endgroup} 3124\else 3125 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 3126 \let\email=\uref 3127 \else 3128 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3129 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3130 \unsepspaces 3131 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3132 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3133 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3134 \endlink 3135 \endgroup} 3136 \fi 3137\fi 3138 3139% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 3140% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 3141% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 3142\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 3143 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3144 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 3145 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 3146 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 3147 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3148 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 3149 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3150 \else 3151 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3152 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3153 \fi\fi\fi 3154} 3155\def\worddistinct{distinct} 3156\def\wordexample{example} 3157\def\wordcode{code} 3158 3159% Default is `distinct'. 3160\kbdinputstyle distinct 3161 3162% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 3163% then @kbd has no effect. 3164\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}} 3165 3166\def\xkey{\key} 3167\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{% 3168 \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 3169 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 3170 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 3171 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 3172} 3173 3174% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. 3175%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 3176%\font\keysy=cmsy9 3177%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 3178% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 3179% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 3180% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 3181% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 3182% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 3183 3184% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already 3185% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But 3186% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. 3187% 3188\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% 3189 \nohyphenation 3190 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi 3191 #1}\null} 3192 3193% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 3194\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 3195 3196% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 3197\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 3198\def\click{\arrow} 3199 3200% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 3201% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 3202% 3203\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 3204 3205% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 3206% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 3207% all-uppercase. 3208% 3209\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 3210\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3211 {\switchtolsize #1}% 3212 \def\temp{#2}% 3213 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3214 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3215 \fi 3216 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3217} 3218 3219% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 3220% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 3221% 3222\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 3223\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3224 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 3225 \def\temp{#2}% 3226 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3227 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3228 \fi 3229 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3230} 3231 3232% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 3233% 3234\def\asis#1{#1} 3235 3236% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 3237% 3238% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 3239% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 3240% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 3241% which is what @var uses. 3242{ 3243 \catcode`\_ = \active 3244 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 3245 \catcode`\_=\active 3246 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 3247 } 3248} 3249% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. 3250% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no 3251% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. 3252% 3253% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 3254\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 3255% 3256\def\math{% 3257 \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already 3258 \tex 3259 \mathunderscore 3260 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 3261 \mathactive 3262 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 3263 \let\"=\ddot 3264 \let\'=\acute 3265 \let\==\bar 3266 \let\^=\hat 3267 \let\`=\grave 3268 \let\u=\breve 3269 \let\v=\check 3270 \let\~=\tilde 3271 \let\dotaccent=\dot 3272 % have to provide another name for sup operator 3273 \let\mathopsup=\sup 3274 $\expandafter\finishmath\fi 3275} 3276\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 3277 3278% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 3279% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 3280% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 3281% 3282{ 3283 \catcode`^ = \active 3284 \catcode`< = \active 3285 \catcode`> = \active 3286 \catcode`+ = \active 3287 \catcode`' = \active 3288 \gdef\mathactive{% 3289 \let^ = \ptexhat 3290 \let< = \ptexless 3291 \let> = \ptexgtr 3292 \let+ = \ptexplus 3293 \let' = \ptexquoteright 3294 } 3295} 3296 3297% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript. 3298% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch 3299% into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the 3300% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not 3301% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices. 3302% 3303\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi} 3304\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3305% 3306\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi} 3307\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3308 3309% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. 3310% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, 3311% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. 3312% 3313\def\outfmtnametex{tex} 3314% 3315\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} 3316\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% 3317 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3318 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3319} 3320% 3321% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if 3322% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT. 3323\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish} 3324\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{% 3325 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3326 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi 3327} 3328% 3329% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid 3330% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for 3331% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being 3332% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal 3333% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as 3334% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the 3335% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. 3336% 3337\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} 3338\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} 3339\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% 3340 \def\inlinerawname{#1}% 3341 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3342 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. 3343} 3344 3345% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set. 3346% 3347\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish} 3348\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{% 3349 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3350 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax 3351 \else\ignorespaces#2\fi 3352} 3353 3354% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set. 3355% 3356\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish} 3357\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{% 3358 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3359 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi 3360} 3361 3362 3363\message{glyphs,} 3364% and logos. 3365 3366% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. 3367\def\@{\char64 } 3368\let\atchar=\@ 3369 3370% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. 3371\def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}} 3372\def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}} 3373\let\{=\lbracechar 3374\let\}=\rbracechar 3375 3376% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 3377\let\comma = , 3378 3379% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 3380% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 3381\let\, = \ptexc 3382\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot 3383\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 3384\let\tieaccent = \ptext 3385\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb 3386\let\udotaccent = \d 3387 3388% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 3389% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 3390\def\questiondown{?`} 3391\def\exclamdown{!`} 3392\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}} 3393\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}} 3394 3395% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 3396\def\imacro{i} 3397\def\jmacro{j} 3398\def\dotless#1{% 3399 \def\temp{#1}% 3400 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 3401 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 3402 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 3403 \fi\fi 3404} 3405 3406% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 3407% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 3408% 3409\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 3410 3411% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 3412% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 3413% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 3414% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 3415% \scriptscriptstyle). 3416% 3417\def\LaTeX{% 3418 L\kern-.36em 3419 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 3420 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% 3421 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt 3422 % for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. 3423 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. 3424 \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% 3425 \else 3426 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. 3427 \switchtolllsize A% 3428 \fi 3429 }% 3430 \vss 3431 }}% 3432 \kern-.15em 3433 \TeX 3434} 3435 3436% Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode 3437% unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here, 3438% but safer, and can't hurt. 3439\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi} 3440\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$} 3441% 3442\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet} 3443\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge} 3444\def\leq{\ensuremath\le} 3445\def\minus{\ensuremath-} 3446 3447% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 3448% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 3449% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 3450% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 3451% whichever is larger. 3452% 3453\def\dots{% 3454 \leavevmode 3455 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 3456 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 3457 \dimen0 = \wd0 3458 \else 3459 \dimen0 = 1.5em 3460 \fi 3461 \hbox to \dimen0{% 3462 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 3463 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3464 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3465 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 3466 }% 3467} 3468 3469% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 3470% 3471\def\enddots{% 3472 \dots 3473 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 3474} 3475 3476% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 3477% 3478% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 3479% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 3480% 3481\def\point{$\star$} 3482\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 3483\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 3484\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 3485\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 3486\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 3487 3488% The @error{} command. 3489% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 3490% 3491\newbox\errorbox 3492% 3493{\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 3494\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 3495% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 3496\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} 3497% 3498\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 3499 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 3500 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 3501 \vbox{% 3502 \hrule height\dimen2 3503 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 3504 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 3505 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 3506 \hrule height\dimen2} 3507 \hfil} 3508% 3509\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 3510 3511% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 3512% 3513\def\pounds{{\it\$}} 3514 3515% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 3516% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 3517% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 3518% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 3519% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 3520% 3521% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 3522% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 3523% font height. 3524% 3525% feymr - regular 3526% feymo - slanted 3527% feybr - bold 3528% feybo - bold slanted 3529% 3530% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 3531% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 3532% Hmm. 3533% 3534% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 3535% Hope not. 3536% 3537% 3538\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 3539\def\eurofont{% 3540 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 3541 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 3542 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 3543 % font installed. 3544 % 3545 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 3546 % that to the current nominal size. 3547 % 3548 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 3549 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 3550 % 3551 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3552 % 3553 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3554 % bold: 3555 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 3556 \else 3557 % regular: 3558 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 3559 \fi 3560 \thiseurofont 3561} 3562 3563% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because 3564% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect 3565% the redefinition. 3566% 3567% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. 3568\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth 3569\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth 3570\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn 3571\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn 3572% 3573\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 3574\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 3575\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 3576\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 3577\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 3578\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 3579\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 3580\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 3581% 3582% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but 3583% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the 3584% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer 3585% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. 3586% 3587% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using 3588% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in 3589% the same EC font. 3590\def\ogonek#1{{% 3591 \def\temp{#1}% 3592 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek 3593 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek 3594 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek 3595 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek 3596 \else 3597 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% 3598 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% 3599 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% 3600 \fi 3601 \fi\fi\fi\fi 3602 }% 3603} 3604\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} 3605\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} 3606\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} 3607\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} 3608% 3609% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format) 3610% for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text 3611% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec 3612% package and follow the same conventions. 3613% 3614\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}} 3615\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}} 3616% 3617\def\etcfont#1{% 3618 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this 3619 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 3620 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 3621 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 3622 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 3623 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3624 \ifmonospace 3625 % typewriter: 3626 \font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3627 \else 3628 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3629 % bold: 3630 \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3631 \else 3632 % regular: 3633 \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3634 \fi 3635 \fi 3636 \thisecfont 3637} 3638 3639% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 3640% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 3641% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 3642% 3643\def\registeredsymbol{% 3644 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}% 3645 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 3646 }$% 3647} 3648 3649% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 3650% 3651\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 3652 3653% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 3654% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 3655% so we'll define it if necessary. 3656% 3657\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined 3658\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 3659\fi 3660 3661% Quotes. 3662\chardef\quotedblleft="5C 3663\chardef\quotedblright=`\" 3664\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 3665\chardef\quoteright=`\' 3666 3667 3668\message{page headings,} 3669 3670\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 3671\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 3672 3673% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 3674\newif\ifseenauthor 3675\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 3676 3677% @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or 3678% @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete. 3679\def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3680 \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3681 command; move your @contents command if you want the contents 3682 after the title page.}}% 3683\def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3684 \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3685 command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you 3686 want the contents after the title page.}}% 3687 3688\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% 3689 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 3690 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 3691 3692\envdef\titlepage{% 3693 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 3694 \begingroup 3695 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 3696 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 3697 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 3698 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 3699 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3700 % 3701 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 3702 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 3703 \let\oldpage = \page 3704 \def\page{% 3705 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3706 \finishtitlepage 3707 \fi 3708 \let\page = \oldpage 3709 \page 3710 \null 3711 }% 3712} 3713 3714\def\Etitlepage{% 3715 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3716 \finishtitlepage 3717 \fi 3718 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 3719 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 3720 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 3721 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 3722 \oldpage 3723 \endgroup 3724 % 3725 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 3726 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 3727 \HEADINGSon 3728} 3729 3730\def\finishtitlepage{% 3731 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 3732 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 3733 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3734} 3735 3736% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation, 3737% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used 3738% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should 3739% be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group. 3740% 3741\def\raggedtitlesettings{% 3742 \rm 3743 \hyphenpenalty=10000 3744 \parindent=0pt 3745 \tolerance=5000 3746 \ptexraggedright 3747} 3748 3749% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 3750 3751\let\subtitlerm=\rmfont 3752\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 3753 3754\parseargdef\title{% 3755 \checkenv\titlepage 3756 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 3757 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 3758 \finishedtitlepagefalse 3759 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 3760} 3761 3762\parseargdef\subtitle{% 3763 \checkenv\titlepage 3764 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 3765} 3766 3767% @author should come last, but may come many times. 3768% It can also be used inside @quotation. 3769% 3770\parseargdef\author{% 3771 \def\temp{\quotation}% 3772 \ifx\thisenv\temp 3773 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 3774 \else 3775 \checkenv\titlepage 3776 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 3777 {\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}% 3778 \fi 3779} 3780 3781 3782% Set up page headings and footings. 3783 3784\let\thispage=\folio 3785 3786\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 3787\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 3788\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 3789\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 3790 3791% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables 3792\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 3793 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 3794\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 3795 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 3796\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 3797 3798% Commands to set those variables. 3799% For example, this is what @headings on does 3800% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 3801% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 3802% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 3803% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 3804 3805 3806\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 3807\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3808\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3809\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3810 3811\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 3812\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3813\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3814\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3815 3816\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 3817 3818\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 3819\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3820\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3821\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3822 3823\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 3824\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3825\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3826 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3827 % 3828 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 3829 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 3830 \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt 3831 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 3832} 3833 3834\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 3835 3836% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 3837% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 3838% 3839% The same set of arguments for: 3840% 3841% @oddheadingmarks 3842% @evenfootingmarks 3843% @oddfootingmarks 3844% @everyheadingmarks 3845% @everyfootingmarks 3846 3847% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks, 3848% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of 3849% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks. 3850% 3851\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 3852\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 3853\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 3854\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 3855\parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 3856 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 3857\parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 3858 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 3859% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 3860\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 3861 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 3862 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 3863} 3864 3865\everyheadingmarks bottom 3866\everyfootingmarks bottom 3867 3868% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 3869% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 3870% @headings off turns them off. 3871% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 3872% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3873% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3874% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3875% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3876% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3877 3878\parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3879 3880\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination 3881 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% 3882 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% 3883} 3884 3885\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting 3886\HEADINGSoff % it's the default 3887 3888% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3889% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3890% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3891% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3892% edge of all pages. 3893\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3894\global\pageno=1 3895\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3896\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3897\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3898\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3899\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3900} 3901\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3902 3903% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3904% page number on top right. 3905\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3906\global\pageno=1 3907\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3908\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3909\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3910\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3911\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3912} 3913\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3914 3915\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3916\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3917\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3918\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3919\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3920\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3921\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3922\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3923} 3924 3925\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3926\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3927\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3928\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3929\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3930\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3931\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3932} 3933 3934% Subroutines used in generating headings 3935% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3936% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 3937% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 3938\ifx\today\thisisundefined 3939\def\today{% 3940 \number\day\space 3941 \ifcase\month 3942 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 3943 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 3944 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 3945 \fi 3946 \space\number\year} 3947\fi 3948 3949% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 3950% It generates no output of its own. 3951\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 3952\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 3953 3954 3955\message{tables,} 3956% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 3957 3958% default indentation of table text 3959\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 3960% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 3961\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 3962% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 3963\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 3964 3965% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 3966\newdimen\itemmax 3967 3968% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 3969% these defs. 3970% They also define \itemindex 3971% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 3972 3973\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 3974 3975\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 3976 3977\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 3978\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 3979 3980\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 3981 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 3982 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 3983 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 3984 \itemindex{#1}% 3985 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 3986 % 3987 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 3988 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 3989 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 3990 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 3991 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 3992 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 3993 % 3994 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 3995 % but leave it ragged-right. 3996 \begingroup 3997 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 3998 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 3999 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax 4000 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 4001 \endgroup 4002 % 4003 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 4004 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 4005 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 4006 % 4007 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 4008 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 4009 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 4010 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 4011 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 4012 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 4013 % 4014 \penalty 10001 4015 \endgroup 4016 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 4017 \else 4018 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 4019 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 4020 \noindent 4021 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 4022 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 4023 % eventually be printed. 4024 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 4025 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 4026 \unhbox0 4027 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 4028 \endgroup 4029 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 4030 \fi 4031} 4032 4033\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 4034\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 4035 4036% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 4037\envdef\table{% 4038 \let\itemindex\gobble 4039 \tablecheck{table}% 4040} 4041\envdef\ftable{% 4042 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 4043 \tablecheck{ftable}% 4044} 4045\envdef\vtable{% 4046 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 4047 \tablecheck{vtable}% 4048} 4049\def\tablecheck#1{% 4050 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 4051 \endgroup 4052 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 4053 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 4054 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 4055 \else 4056 \let\next\tablex 4057 \fi 4058 \next 4059} 4060\def\tablex#1{% 4061 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 4062 \parsearg\tabley 4063} 4064\def\tabley#1{% 4065 {% 4066 \makevalueexpandable 4067 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 4068 \expandafter 4069 }\temp \endtablez 4070} 4071\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 4072 \aboveenvbreak 4073 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 4074 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 4075 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 4076 \itemmax=\tableindent 4077 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 4078 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 4079 \exdentamount=\tableindent 4080 \parindent = 0pt 4081 \parskip = \smallskipamount 4082 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4083 \let\item = \internalBitem 4084 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 4085} 4086\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 4087\let\Eftable\Etable 4088\let\Evtable\Etable 4089\let\Eitemize\Etable 4090\let\Eenumerate\Etable 4091 4092% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 4093 4094\newcount \itemno 4095 4096\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 4097 4098\def\doitemize#1{% 4099 \aboveenvbreak 4100 \itemmax=\itemindent 4101 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 4102 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 4103 \exdentamount=\itemindent 4104 \parindent=0pt 4105 \parskip=\smallskipamount 4106 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4107 % 4108 % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says 4109 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error 4110 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the 4111 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if 4112 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. 4113 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 4114 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% 4115 % 4116 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 4117 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 4118 % 4119 \let\item=\itemizeitem 4120} 4121 4122% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 4123% 4124\def\itemizeitem{% 4125 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 4126 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 4127 {% 4128 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 4129 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 4130 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 4131 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 4132 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 4133 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 4134 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 4135 % that's the theory. 4136 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 4137 \noindent 4138 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 4139 % 4140 \ifinner\else 4141 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item. 4142 \fi 4143 % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an 4144 % @itemize looks awful there. 4145 }% 4146 \flushcr 4147} 4148 4149% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 4150% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 4151% 4152\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 4153 4154% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 4155% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 4156% argument is the same as `1'. 4157% 4158\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 4159\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 4160 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 4161 \def\thearg{#1}% 4162 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 4163 % 4164 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 4165 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 4166 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 4167 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 4168 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 4169 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 4170 \ifx\rest\empty 4171 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 4172 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 4173 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 4174 % not equal to itself. 4175 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 4176 % 4177 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 4178 % continuing to look for a <number>. 4179 % 4180 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 4181 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 4182 \else 4183 % It's a letter. 4184 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 4185 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 4186 \else 4187 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 4188 \fi 4189 \fi 4190 \else 4191 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 4192 \numericenumerate 4193 \fi 4194} 4195 4196% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 4197% given in \thearg. 4198% 4199\def\numericenumerate{% 4200 \itemno = \thearg 4201 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 4202} 4203 4204% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 4205\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 4206 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4207 \startenumeration{% 4208 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4209 \ifnum\itemno=0 4210 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4211 alphabet}% 4212 \fi 4213 \char\lccode\itemno 4214 }% 4215} 4216 4217% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 4218\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 4219 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4220 \startenumeration{% 4221 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4222 \ifnum\itemno=0 4223 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4224 alphabet} 4225 \fi 4226 \char\uccode\itemno 4227 }% 4228} 4229 4230% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 4231% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 4232% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 4233% 4234\def\startenumeration#1{% 4235 \advance\itemno by -1 4236 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 4237} 4238 4239% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 4240% to @enumerate. 4241% 4242\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 4243\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 4244\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 4245\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 4246 4247 4248% @multitable macros 4249% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 4250% 4251% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 4252% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 4253% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 4254% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 4255 4256% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 4257 4258% To make preamble: 4259% 4260% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 4261% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 4262% @item ... 4263% 4264% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 4265% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 4266% columns as desired. 4267 4268 4269% Or use a template: 4270% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 4271% @item ... 4272% using the widest term desired in each column. 4273 4274% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 4275% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 4276% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 4277% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 4278 4279% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 4280% if they are. 4281 4282% Sample multitable: 4283 4284% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 4285% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 4286% @item 4287% first col stuff 4288% @tab 4289% second col stuff 4290% @tab 4291% third col 4292% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 4293% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 4294% 4295% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 4296% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 4297% @end multitable 4298 4299% Default dimensions may be reset by user. 4300% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 4301% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 4302% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 4303% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 4304% to baseline. 4305% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 4306% 4307\newskip\multitableparskip 4308\newskip\multitableparindent 4309\newdimen\multitablecolspace 4310\newskip\multitablelinespace 4311\multitableparskip=0pt 4312\multitableparindent=6pt 4313\multitablecolspace=12pt 4314\multitablelinespace=0pt 4315 4316% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 4317% 4318\let\endsetuptable\relax 4319\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 4320\let\columnfractions\relax 4321\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 4322\newif\ifsetpercent 4323 4324% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 4325% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 4326% 4327\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 4328 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4329 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 4330 \setuptable 4331} 4332 4333\newcount\colcount 4334\def\setuptable#1{% 4335 \def\firstarg{#1}% 4336 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 4337 \let\go = \relax 4338 \else 4339 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 4340 \global\setpercenttrue 4341 \else 4342 \ifsetpercent 4343 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 4344 \else 4345 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4346 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 4347 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 4348 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 4349 \fi 4350 \fi 4351 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 4352 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 4353 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 4354 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 4355 \else 4356 \let\go = \setuptable 4357 \fi% 4358 \fi 4359 \go 4360} 4361 4362% multitable-only commands. 4363% 4364% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments 4365% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an 4366% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to 4367% undo it ourselves. 4368\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable 4369\def\headitem{% 4370 \checkenv\multitable 4371 \crcr 4372 \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings 4373 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs 4374 \the\everytab % for the first item 4375}% 4376% 4377% default for tables with no headings. 4378\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4379% 4380% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 4381% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 4382% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. 4383% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. 4384\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 4385 4386% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 4387% 4388\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 4389% 4390\envdef\multitable{% 4391 \vskip\parskip 4392 \startsavinginserts 4393 % 4394 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 4395 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 4396 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 4397 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 4398 \def\item{\crcr}% 4399 % 4400 \tolerance=9500 4401 \hbadness=9500 4402 \setmultitablespacing 4403 \parskip=\multitableparskip 4404 \parindent=\multitableparindent 4405 \overfullrule=0pt 4406 \global\colcount=0 4407 % 4408 \everycr = {% 4409 \noalign{% 4410 \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem. 4411 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 4412 % 4413 % Check for saved footnotes, etc.: 4414 \checkinserts 4415 % 4416 % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset: 4417 \headitemcrhook 4418 \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4419 }% 4420 }% 4421 % 4422 \parsearg\domultitable 4423} 4424\def\domultitable#1{% 4425 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 4426 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 4427 % 4428 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 4429 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 4430 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 4431 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 4432 \halign\bgroup &% 4433 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4434 \multistrut 4435 \vtop{% 4436 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 4437 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 4438 % 4439 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 4440 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 4441 % the first one. 4442 % 4443 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 4444 % to the width of each template entry. 4445 % 4446 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 4447 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 4448 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 4449 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 4450 % 4451 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 4452 \rightskip=0pt 4453 \ifnum\colcount=1 4454 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 4455 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 4456 \else 4457 \ifsetpercent \else 4458 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 4459 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 4460 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 4461 \fi 4462 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 4463 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 4464 \fi 4465 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 4466 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 4467 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 4468 % For example: 4469 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 4470 % @item @code{#} 4471 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 4472 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 4473 % marking characters. 4474 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 4475 }\cr 4476} 4477\def\Emultitable{% 4478 \crcr 4479 \egroup % end the \halign 4480 \global\setpercentfalse 4481} 4482 4483\def\setmultitablespacing{% 4484 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 4485 % 4486 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 4487 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 4488 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 4489 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 4490\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 4491\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 4492\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 4493\fi 4494% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 4495% table. If not, do nothing. 4496% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 4497\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 4498\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4499\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4500 % than skip between lines in the table. 4501\fi% 4502\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 4503\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4504\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4505 % than skip between lines in the table. 4506\fi} 4507 4508 4509\message{conditionals,} 4510 4511% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 4512% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 4513% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 4514% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 4515% attempt to close an environment group. 4516% 4517\def\makecond#1{% 4518 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 4519 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 4520} 4521\makecond{iftex} 4522\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 4523\makecond{ifnothtml} 4524\makecond{ifnotinfo} 4525\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 4526\makecond{ifnotxml} 4527 4528% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 4529% 4530\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 4531\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 4532\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 4533\def\html{\doignore{html}} 4534\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 4535\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 4536\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 4537\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 4538\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 4539\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 4540\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 4541\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 4542\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 4543 4544% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 4545% 4546% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 4547\newcount\doignorecount 4548 4549\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 4550 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 4551 \obeylines 4552 \catcode`\@ = \other 4553 \catcode`\{ = \other 4554 \catcode`\} = \other 4555 % 4556 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 4557 \spaceisspace 4558 % 4559 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 4560 \doignorecount = 0 4561 % 4562 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 4563 \dodoignore{#1}% 4564} 4565 4566{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 4567 \obeylines % 4568 % 4569 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 4570 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 4571 % 4572 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 4573 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 4574 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 4575 % 4576 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 4577 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 4578 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 4579 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 4580 % 4581 % And now expand that command. 4582 \doignoretext ^^M% 4583 }% 4584} 4585 4586\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 4587 \def\temp{#1}% 4588 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 4589 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 4590 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 4591 \advance\doignorecount by 1 4592 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 4593 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 4594 \fi 4595 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 4596} 4597 4598% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 4599% 4600\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 4601 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 4602 \let\next\enddoignore 4603 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 4604 \advance\doignorecount by -1 4605 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 4606 \fi 4607 \next 4608} 4609 4610% Finish off ignored text. 4611{ \obeylines% 4612 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 4613 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 4614 % would result in a blank line in the output. 4615 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 4616} 4617 4618 4619% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 4620% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 4621% 4622% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 4623% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 4624% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 4625% didn't need it. 4626% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 4627% 4628\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 4629\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 4630 {% 4631 \makevalueexpandable 4632 \def\temp{#2}% 4633 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 4634 \ifx\temp\empty 4635 \next{}% 4636 \else 4637 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 4638 \fi 4639 }% 4640} 4641% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 4642\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 4643 4644% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 4645% 4646\parseargdef\clear{% 4647 {% 4648 \makevalueexpandable 4649 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 4650 }% 4651} 4652 4653% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 4654\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 4655\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 4656{ 4657 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 4658 % 4659 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 4660 \let\value = \expandablevalue 4661 % We don't want these characters active, ... 4662 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 4663 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 4664 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 4665 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 4666 \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore 4667 } 4668} 4669 4670% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's 4671% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). 4672% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since 4673% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the 4674% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain 4675% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work 4676% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). 4677% 4678% Unfortunately, this has the consequence that when _ is in the *value* 4679% of an @set, it does not print properly in the roman fonts (get the cmr 4680% dot accent at position 126 instead). No fix comes to mind, and it's 4681% been this way since 2003 or earlier, so just ignore it. 4682% 4683\def\expandablevalue#1{% 4684 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4685 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 4686 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 4687 \else 4688 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4689 \fi 4690} 4691 4692% Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the 4693% definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when 4694% writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does. 4695% If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it 4696% will be set by the time it is read back in. 4697% 4698% NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here. 4699\def\dummyvalue#1{% 4700 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4701 \noexpand\value{#1}% 4702 \else 4703 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4704 \fi 4705} 4706 4707% Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value 4708% if possible, otherwise sort late. 4709\def\indexnofontsvalue#1{% 4710 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4711 ZZZZZZZ 4712 \else 4713 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4714 \fi 4715} 4716 4717% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 4718% with @set. 4719% 4720% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call 4721% \makecond and then redefine. 4722% 4723\makecond{ifset} 4724\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 4725\def\doifset#1#2{% 4726 {% 4727 \makevalueexpandable 4728 \let\next=\empty 4729 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 4730 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 4731 \fi 4732 \expandafter 4733 }\next 4734} 4735\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 4736 4737% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been 4738% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 4739% 4740% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 4741% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 4742% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 4743% 4744\makecond{ifclear} 4745\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 4746\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 4747 4748% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written 4749% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the 4750% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered 4751% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command. 4752% 4753\makecond{ifcommanddefined} 4754\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}} 4755% 4756\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{% 4757 \makevalueexpandable 4758 \let\next=\empty 4759 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax 4760 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above. 4761 \fi 4762 \expandafter 4763 }\next 4764} 4765\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}} 4766 4767% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above. 4768\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined} 4769\def\ifcommandnotdefined{% 4770 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}} 4771\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}} 4772 4773% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to 4774% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available. 4775\set txicommandconditionals 4776 4777% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 4778% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 4779\let\dircategory=\comment 4780 4781% @defininfoenclose. 4782\let\definfoenclose=\comment 4783 4784 4785\message{indexing,} 4786% Index generation facilities 4787 4788% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 4789% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 4790\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 4791 4792% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX. 4793% It automatically defines \IXindex such that 4794% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX. 4795% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for 4796% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX. 4797% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 4798% for the sake of vms. 4799% 4800\def\newindex#1{% 4801 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4802 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 4803 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 4804} 4805 4806% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 4807% 4808\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 4809 4810% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 4811% 4812\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 4813% 4814\def\newcodeindex#1{% 4815 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4816 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 4817 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 4818} 4819 4820% The default indices: 4821\newindex{cp}% concepts, 4822\newcodeindex{fn}% functions, 4823\newcodeindex{vr}% variables, 4824\newcodeindex{tp}% types, 4825\newcodeindex{ky}% keys 4826\newcodeindex{pg}% and programs. 4827 4828 4829% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 4830% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 4831% 4832% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 4833% inside @code. 4834% 4835\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 4836\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 4837 4838% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 4839% #3 the target index (bar). 4840\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 4841 \requireopenindexfile{#3}% 4842 % redefine \fooindfile: 4843 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 4844 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 4845 % redefine \fooindex: 4846 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 4847} 4848 4849% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros. 4850% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 4851% and it is the two-letter name of the index. 4852 4853\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx} 4854\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 4855 4856% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 4857\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx} 4858\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 4859 4860 4861% Used when writing an index entry out to an index file to prevent 4862% expansion of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. 4863% 4864\def\indexdummies{% 4865 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. 4866 \definedummyletter\@% 4867 \definedummyletter\ % 4868 % 4869 % For texindex which always views { and } as separators. 4870 \def\{{\lbracechar{}}% 4871 \def\}{\rbracechar{}}% 4872 % 4873 % Do the redefinitions. 4874 \definedummies 4875} 4876 4877% Used for the aux and toc files, where @ is the escape character. 4878% 4879\def\atdummies{% 4880 \definedummyletter\@% 4881 \definedummyletter\ % 4882 \definedummyletter\{% 4883 \definedummyletter\}% 4884 % 4885 % Do the redefinitions. 4886 \definedummies 4887 \otherbackslash 4888} 4889 4890% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 4891% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, 4892% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 4893% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 4894% from whatever follows. 4895% 4896% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 4897% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 4898% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 4899% 4900% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 4901% space. 4902% 4903\def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}% 4904\def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}% 4905\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 4906 4907% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies, to effectively prevent 4908% the expansion of commands. 4909% 4910\def\definedummies{% 4911 % 4912 \let\commondummyword\definedummyword 4913 \let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter 4914 \let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent 4915 \commondummiesnofonts 4916 % 4917 \definedummyletter\_% 4918 \definedummyletter\-% 4919 % 4920 % Non-English letters. 4921 \definedummyword\AA 4922 \definedummyword\AE 4923 \definedummyword\DH 4924 \definedummyword\L 4925 \definedummyword\O 4926 \definedummyword\OE 4927 \definedummyword\TH 4928 \definedummyword\aa 4929 \definedummyword\ae 4930 \definedummyword\dh 4931 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4932 \definedummyword\l 4933 \definedummyword\o 4934 \definedummyword\oe 4935 \definedummyword\ordf 4936 \definedummyword\ordm 4937 \definedummyword\questiondown 4938 \definedummyword\ss 4939 \definedummyword\th 4940 % 4941 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4942 \definedummyword\bf 4943 \definedummyword\gtr 4944 \definedummyword\hat 4945 \definedummyword\less 4946 \definedummyword\sf 4947 \definedummyword\sl 4948 \definedummyword\tclose 4949 \definedummyword\tt 4950 % 4951 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4952 \definedummyword\TeX 4953 % 4954 % Assorted special characters. 4955 \definedummyword\atchar 4956 \definedummyword\arrow 4957 \definedummyword\bullet 4958 \definedummyword\comma 4959 \definedummyword\copyright 4960 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4961 \definedummyword\dots 4962 \definedummyword\enddots 4963 \definedummyword\entrybreak 4964 \definedummyword\equiv 4965 \definedummyword\error 4966 \definedummyword\euro 4967 \definedummyword\expansion 4968 \definedummyword\geq 4969 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4970 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4971 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4972 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4973 \definedummyword\lbracechar 4974 \definedummyword\leq 4975 \definedummyword\mathopsup 4976 \definedummyword\minus 4977 \definedummyword\ogonek 4978 \definedummyword\pounds 4979 \definedummyword\point 4980 \definedummyword\print 4981 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4982 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4983 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4984 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4985 \definedummyword\quoteright 4986 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4987 \definedummyword\rbracechar 4988 \definedummyword\result 4989 \definedummyword\sub 4990 \definedummyword\sup 4991 \definedummyword\textdegree 4992 % 4993 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4994 \macrolist 4995 \let\value\dummyvalue 4996 % 4997 \normalturnoffactive 4998} 4999 5000% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts. 5001% Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before 5002% using. Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters. 5003% 5004\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 5005 % Control letters and accents. 5006 \commondummyletter\!% 5007 \commondummyaccent\"% 5008 \commondummyaccent\'% 5009 \commondummyletter\*% 5010 \commondummyaccent\,% 5011 \commondummyletter\.% 5012 \commondummyletter\/% 5013 \commondummyletter\:% 5014 \commondummyaccent\=% 5015 \commondummyletter\?% 5016 \commondummyaccent\^% 5017 \commondummyaccent\`% 5018 \commondummyaccent\~% 5019 \commondummyword\u 5020 \commondummyword\v 5021 \commondummyword\H 5022 \commondummyword\dotaccent 5023 \commondummyword\ogonek 5024 \commondummyword\ringaccent 5025 \commondummyword\tieaccent 5026 \commondummyword\ubaraccent 5027 \commondummyword\udotaccent 5028 \commondummyword\dotless 5029 % 5030 % Texinfo font commands. 5031 \commondummyword\b 5032 \commondummyword\i 5033 \commondummyword\r 5034 \commondummyword\sansserif 5035 \commondummyword\sc 5036 \commondummyword\slanted 5037 \commondummyword\t 5038 % 5039 % Commands that take arguments. 5040 \commondummyword\abbr 5041 \commondummyword\acronym 5042 \commondummyword\anchor 5043 \commondummyword\cite 5044 \commondummyword\code 5045 \commondummyword\command 5046 \commondummyword\dfn 5047 \commondummyword\dmn 5048 \commondummyword\email 5049 \commondummyword\emph 5050 \commondummyword\env 5051 \commondummyword\file 5052 \commondummyword\image 5053 \commondummyword\indicateurl 5054 \commondummyword\inforef 5055 \commondummyword\kbd 5056 \commondummyword\key 5057 \commondummyword\math 5058 \commondummyword\option 5059 \commondummyword\pxref 5060 \commondummyword\ref 5061 \commondummyword\samp 5062 \commondummyword\strong 5063 \commondummyword\tie 5064 \commondummyword\U 5065 \commondummyword\uref 5066 \commondummyword\url 5067 \commondummyword\var 5068 \commondummyword\verb 5069 \commondummyword\w 5070 \commondummyword\xref 5071} 5072 5073% This does nothing, but for a time it was recommended to use 5074% \usebracesinindexestrue to be able to use braces in index entries. 5075 5076\let\indexlbrace\relax 5077\let\indexrbrace\relax 5078 5079{\catcode`\@=0 5080\catcode`\\=13 5081 @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}} 5082} 5083 5084{ 5085\catcode`\<=13 5086\catcode`\-=13 5087\catcode`\`=13 5088 \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{% 5089 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else 5090 % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term. 5091 % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.) 5092 \let`=\empty 5093 \fi 5094 % 5095 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else 5096 \backslashdisappear 5097 \fi 5098 % 5099 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else 5100 \def-{}% 5101 \fi 5102 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else 5103 \def<{}% 5104 \fi 5105 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else 5106 \def\@{}% 5107 \fi 5108 } 5109 5110 \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{% 5111 \useindexbackslash 5112 \let-\normaldash 5113 \let<\normalless 5114 \def\@{@}% 5115 } 5116} 5117 5118 5119% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 5120% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 5121% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 5122% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 5123% 5124\def\indexnofonts{% 5125 % Accent commands should become @asis. 5126 \def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 5127 % We can just ignore other control letters. 5128 \def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 5129 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. 5130 \let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent 5131 \commondummiesnofonts 5132 % 5133 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 5134 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 5135 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 5136 %\let\tt=\asis 5137 % 5138 \def\ { }% 5139 \def\@{@}% 5140 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 5141 \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting 5142 % 5143 \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}% 5144 \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}% 5145 \let\lbracechar\{% 5146 \let\rbracechar\}% 5147 % 5148 % Non-English letters. 5149 \def\AA{AA}% 5150 \def\AE{AE}% 5151 \def\DH{DZZ}% 5152 \def\L{L}% 5153 \def\OE{OE}% 5154 \def\O{O}% 5155 \def\TH{TH}% 5156 \def\aa{aa}% 5157 \def\ae{ae}% 5158 \def\dh{dzz}% 5159 \def\exclamdown{!}% 5160 \def\l{l}% 5161 \def\oe{oe}% 5162 \def\ordf{a}% 5163 \def\ordm{o}% 5164 \def\o{o}% 5165 \def\questiondown{?}% 5166 \def\ss{ss}% 5167 \def\th{th}% 5168 % 5169 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 5170 \def\TeX{TeX}% 5171 % 5172 % Assorted special characters. \defglyph gives the control sequence a 5173 % definition that removes the {} that follows its use. 5174 \defglyph\atchar{@}% 5175 \defglyph\arrow{->}% 5176 \defglyph\bullet{bullet}% 5177 \defglyph\comma{,}% 5178 \defglyph\copyright{copyright}% 5179 \defglyph\dots{...}% 5180 \defglyph\enddots{...}% 5181 \defglyph\equiv{==}% 5182 \defglyph\error{error}% 5183 \defglyph\euro{euro}% 5184 \defglyph\expansion{==>}% 5185 \defglyph\geq{>=}% 5186 \defglyph\guillemetleft{<<}% 5187 \defglyph\guillemetright{>>}% 5188 \defglyph\guilsinglleft{<}% 5189 \defglyph\guilsinglright{>}% 5190 \defglyph\leq{<=}% 5191 \defglyph\lbracechar{\{}% 5192 \defglyph\minus{-}% 5193 \defglyph\point{.}% 5194 \defglyph\pounds{pounds}% 5195 \defglyph\print{-|}% 5196 \defglyph\quotedblbase{"}% 5197 \defglyph\quotedblleft{"}% 5198 \defglyph\quotedblright{"}% 5199 \defglyph\quoteleft{`}% 5200 \defglyph\quoteright{'}% 5201 \defglyph\quotesinglbase{,}% 5202 \defglyph\rbracechar{\}}% 5203 \defglyph\registeredsymbol{R}% 5204 \defglyph\result{=>}% 5205 \defglyph\textdegree{o}% 5206 % 5207 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 5208 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 5209 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 5210 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 5211 % that starts with \. 5212 % 5213 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 5214 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 5215 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 5216 % 5217 \macrolist 5218 \let\value\indexnofontsvalue 5219} 5220\def\defglyph#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}} % see above 5221 5222 5223 5224 5225\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? 5226 5227% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 5228\def\doind#1#2{% 5229 \iflinks 5230 {% 5231 % 5232 \requireopenindexfile{#1}% 5233 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 5234 % 5235 \def\indextext{#2}% 5236 \safewhatsit\doindwrite 5237 }% 5238 \fi 5239} 5240 5241% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it. 5242\def\requireopenindexfile#1{% 5243\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0 5244 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 5245 \edef\suffix{#1}% 5246 % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output 5247 % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead. 5248 \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi 5249 % Open the file 5250 \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix 5251 % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current 5252 % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for 5253 % preceding skips. 5254 \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}% 5255\fi} 5256\def\indexisfl{fl} 5257 5258% Output \ as {\indexbackslash}, because \ is an escape character in 5259% the index files. 5260\let\indexbackslash=\relax 5261{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active 5262 @gdef@useindexbackslash{@def\{{@indexbackslash}}} 5263} 5264 5265% Definition for writing index entry sort key. 5266{ 5267\catcode`\-=13 5268\gdef\indexwritesortas{% 5269 \begingroup 5270 \indexnonalnumreappear 5271 \indexwritesortasxxx} 5272\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{% 5273 \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup} 5274} 5275 5276% Given index entry text like "aaa @subentry bbb @sortas{ZZZ}": 5277% * Set \bracedtext to "{aaa}{bbb}" 5278% * Set \fullindexsortkey to "aaa @subentry ZZZ" 5279% 5280\def\splitindexentry#1{% 5281 \gdef\fullindexsortkey{}% 5282 \xdef\bracedtext{}% 5283 \def\sep{}% 5284 \expandafter\doindexsegment#1\subentry\finish\subentry 5285} 5286 5287% append the results from the next segment 5288\def\doindexsegment#1\subentry{% 5289 \def\segment{#1}% 5290 \ifx\segment\isfinish 5291 \else 5292 % 5293 % Fully expand the segment, throwing away any @sortas directives, and 5294 % trim spaces. 5295 \def\sortas##1{}% 5296 \edef\trimmed{\segment}% 5297 \edef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}% 5298 % 5299 \xdef\bracedtext{\bracedtext{\trimmed}}% 5300 % 5301 % Get the string to sort by. Process the segment with all 5302 % font commands turned off. 5303 \bgroup 5304 \let\sortas\indexwritesortas 5305 \indexnofonts 5306 % The braces around the commands are recognized by texindex. 5307 \def\lbracechar{{\indexlbrace}}% 5308 \def\rbracechar{{\indexrbrace}}% 5309 \let\{=\lbracechar 5310 \let\}=\rbracechar 5311 % 5312 \let\indexsortkey\empty 5313 % Execute the segment and throw away the typeset output. This executes 5314 % any @sortas commands in this segment. 5315 \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\segment}% 5316 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty{% 5317 \indexnonalnumdisappear 5318 \xdef\trimmed{\segment}% 5319 \xdef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}% 5320 \xdef\indexsortkey{\trimmed}% 5321 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi 5322 }\fi 5323 % 5324 % Append to \fullindexsortkey. 5325 \edef\tmp{\gdef\noexpand\fullindexsortkey{% 5326 \fullindexsortkey\sep\indexsortkey}}% 5327 \tmp 5328 \egroup 5329 \def\sep{\subentry}% 5330 % 5331 \expandafter\doindexsegment 5332 \fi 5333} 5334\def\isfinish{\finish}% 5335 5336\let\subentry\relax 5337 5338% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file. 5339% 5340\def\doindwrite{% 5341 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. 5342 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 5343 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% 5344 \fi 5345 % 5346 % Remember, we are within a group. 5347 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage 5348 \useindexbackslash % \indexbackslash isn't defined now so it will be output 5349 % as is; and it will print as backslash. 5350 % 5351 % Split the entry into primary entry and any subentries, and get the index 5352 % sort key. 5353 \splitindexentry\indextext 5354 % 5355 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 5356 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 5357 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 5358 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 5359 % sorted result. 5360 % 5361 \edef\temp{% 5362 \write\writeto{% 5363 \string\entry{\fullindexsortkey}{\noexpand\folio}\bracedtext}% 5364 }% 5365 \temp 5366} 5367\newbox\dummybox % used above 5368 5369% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 5370% 5371% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 5372% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 5373% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 5374% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 5375% sequences like this: 5376% @end defun 5377% @tindex whatever 5378% @defun ... 5379% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 5380% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 5381% the previous defun. 5382% 5383% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 5384% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 5385% 5386% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 5387% 5388% But wait, there is a catch there: 5389% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 5390% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 5391% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 5392% representation of the skip. 5393% 5394% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 5395% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 5396% 5397\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 5398% 5399\newskip\whatsitskip 5400\newcount\whatsitpenalty 5401% 5402% ..., ready, GO: 5403% 5404\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode 5405 #1% 5406 \else 5407 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 5408 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 5409 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 5410 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 5411 % 5412 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 5413 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 5414 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 5415 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 5416 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 5417 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5418 \else 5419 \vskip-\whatsitskip 5420 \fi 5421 % 5422 #1% 5423 % 5424 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5425 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 5426 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 5427 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 5428 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 5429 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 5430 % @deffn deffn-whatever 5431 % @vindex index-whatever 5432 % Description. 5433 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 5434 % and the "Description." paragraph. 5435 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 5436 \else 5437 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 5438 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 5439 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 5440 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 5441 \fi 5442\fi} 5443 5444% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 5445% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 5446% or 5447% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 5448% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 5449% containing these kinds of lines: 5450% \initial {c} 5451% before the first topic whose initial is c 5452% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 5453% for a topic that is used without subtopics 5454% \primary {topic} 5455% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 5456% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 5457% for each subtopic. 5458 5459% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 5460% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 5461 5462\def\findex {\fnindex} 5463\def\kindex {\kyindex} 5464\def\cindex {\cpindex} 5465\def\vindex {\vrindex} 5466\def\tindex {\tpindex} 5467\def\pindex {\pgindex} 5468 5469% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 5470 5471% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 5472% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 5473% 5474\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 5475 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 5476 % 5477 \smallfonts \rm 5478 \tolerance = 9500 5479 \plainfrenchspacing 5480 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 5481 % 5482 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 5483 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains 5484 % \initial {@} 5485 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces 5486 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). 5487 \catcode`\@ = 12 5488 % See comment in \requireopenindexfile. 5489 \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi 5490 \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s 5491 \ifeof 1 5492 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 5493 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 5494 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 5495 % there is some text. 5496 \putwordIndexNonexistent 5497 \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}% 5498 \else 5499 \catcode`\\ = 0 5500 % 5501 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 5502 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 5503 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 5504 \read 1 to \thisline 5505 \ifeof 1 5506 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 5507 \else 5508 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape 5509 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change 5510 % to make right now. 5511 \def\indexbackslash{\ttbackslash}% 5512 \let\indexlbrace\{ % Likewise, set these sequences for braces 5513 \let\indexrbrace\} % used in the sort key. 5514 \begindoublecolumns 5515 \let\dotheinsertentrybox\dotheinsertentryboxwithpenalty 5516 % 5517 % Read input from the index file line by line. 5518 \loopdo 5519 \ifeof1 \else 5520 \read 1 to \nextline 5521 \fi 5522 % 5523 \indexinputprocessing 5524 \thisline 5525 % 5526 \ifeof1\else 5527 \let\thisline\nextline 5528 \repeat 5529 %% 5530 \enddoublecolumns 5531 \fi 5532 \fi 5533 \closein 1 5534\endgroup} 5535\def\loopdo#1\repeat{\def\body{#1}\loopdoxxx} 5536\def\loopdoxxx{\let\next=\relax\body\let\next=\loopdoxxx\fi\next} 5537 5538\def\indexinputprocessing{% 5539 \ifeof1 5540 \let\firsttoken\relax 5541 \else 5542 \edef\act{\gdef\noexpand\firsttoken{\getfirsttoken\nextline}}% 5543 \act 5544 \fi 5545} 5546\def\getfirsttoken#1{\expandafter\getfirsttokenx#1\endfirsttoken} 5547\long\def\getfirsttokenx#1#2\endfirsttoken{\noexpand#1} 5548 5549 5550% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 5551% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 5552 5553{\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13 5554\catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13 5555\catcode`\$=3 5556\gdef\initialglyphs{% 5557 % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the 5558 % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere 5559 % for these characters. 5560 \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}% 5561 \let\\=\indexbackslash 5562 % 5563 % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash 5564 \catcode`\/=13 5565 \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}% 5566 \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--' 5567 \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}% 5568 \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}% 5569 \def\_{% 5570 \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }% 5571 \def|{$\vert$}% 5572 \def<{$\less$}% 5573 \def>{$\gtr$}% 5574 \def+{$\normalplus$}% 5575}} 5576 5577\def\initial{% 5578 \bgroup 5579 \initialglyphs 5580 \initialx 5581} 5582 5583\def\initialx#1{% 5584 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 5585 \removelastskip 5586 % 5587 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 5588 % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the 5589 % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing. 5590 \nobreak 5591 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 5592 \penalty -300 5593 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 5594 % 5595 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 5596 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 5597 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 5598 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 5599 % 5600 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 5601 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip 5602 \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}% 5603 % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of 5604 % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that 5605 % \leftline creates. 5606 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 5607 \nobreak 5608 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 5609 \egroup % \initialglyphs 5610} 5611 5612\newdimen\entryrightmargin 5613\entryrightmargin=0pt 5614 5615% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 5616% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 5617% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 5618% 5619\def\entry{% 5620 \begingroup 5621 % 5622 % For pdfTeX and XeTeX. 5623 % The redefinition of \domark stops marks being added in \pdflink to 5624 % preserve coloured links across page boundaries. Otherwise the marks 5625 % would get in the way of \lastbox in \insertentrybox. 5626 \let\domark\relax 5627 % 5628 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 5629 % affect previous text. 5630 \par 5631 % 5632 % No extra space above this paragraph. 5633 \parskip = 0in 5634 % 5635 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks 5636 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section 5637 % titles, for instance. 5638 \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5639 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command 5640 % 5641 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 5642 \afterassignment\doentry 5643 \let\temp = 5644} 5645\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5646\def\doentry{% 5647 % Save the text of the entry 5648 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5649 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 5650 \noindent 5651 \aftergroup\finishentry 5652 % And now comes the text of the entry. 5653 % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems 5654 % with catcodes occurring. 5655} 5656{\catcode`\@=11 5657\gdef\finishentry#1{% 5658 \egroup % end box A 5659 \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry 5660 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup\unhbox\boxA 5661 % #1 is the page number. 5662 % 5663 % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use 5664 % leaders if they are present. 5665 \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}% 5666 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5667 \null\nobreak\hfill\ % 5668 \else 5669 % 5670 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 5671 % 5672 \ifpdf 5673 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5674 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5675 \else 5676 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 5677 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1% 5678 \else 5679 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5680 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5681 \fi 5682 \fi 5683 \fi 5684 \egroup % end \boxA 5685 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5686 \global\setbox\entrybox=\vbox{\unhbox\boxA}% 5687 \else 5688 \global\setbox\entrybox=\vbox\bgroup 5689 % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the 5690 % page numbers to be aligned to the right. 5691 % 5692 \parindent = 0pt 5693 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil 5694 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill 5695 \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil 5696 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill 5697 % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own 5698 % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right. 5699 \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill 5700 % 5701 \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin 5702 % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin. 5703 % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H GNU Free Documentation License" to 5704 % fit on one line in @letterpaper format. 5705 \ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em 5706 \dimen@i=2.1em 5707 \else 5708 \dimen@i=0em 5709 \fi 5710 \advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i 5711 % 5712 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5713 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip 5714 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin 5715 \advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i 5716 \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line 5717 \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text 5718 % Try to split the text roughly evenly. \dimen@ will be the length of 5719 % the first line. 5720 \dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@ 5721 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5722 \ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii 5723 % If the entry is too long (for example, if it needs more than 5724 % two lines), use all the space in the first line. 5725 \dimen@ = \dimen@ii 5726 \fi 5727 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right 5728 \advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip 5729 \parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 0em \dimen@ii 5730 % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only, 5731 % instead of using \parshape with explicit line lengths, but TeX 5732 % doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing. 5733 % 5734 % Indent all lines but the first one. 5735 \advance\leftskip by 1em 5736 \advance\parindent by -1em 5737 \fi\fi 5738 \indent % start paragraph 5739 \unhbox\boxA 5740 % 5741 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 5742 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 5743 % 5744 % Word spacing - no stretch 5745 \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font 5746 % 5747 \linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks. 5748 \hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation. 5749 % 5750 \par % format the paragraph 5751 \egroup % The \vbox 5752 \fi 5753 \endgroup 5754 \dotheinsertentrybox 5755}} 5756 5757\newskip\thinshrinkable 5758\skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em 5759 5760\newbox\entrybox 5761\def\insertentrybox{% 5762 \ourunvbox\entrybox 5763} 5764 5765% default definition 5766\let\dotheinsertentrybox\insertentrybox 5767 5768% Use \lastbox to take apart vbox box by box, and add each sub-box 5769% to the current vertical list. 5770\def\ourunvbox#1{% 5771\bgroup % for local binding of \delayedbox 5772 % Remove the last box from box #1 5773 \global\setbox#1=\vbox{% 5774 \unvbox#1% 5775 \unskip % remove any glue 5776 \unpenalty 5777 \global\setbox\interbox=\lastbox 5778 }% 5779 \setbox\delayedbox=\box\interbox 5780 \ifdim\ht#1=0pt\else 5781 \ourunvbox#1 % Repeat on what's left of the box 5782 \nobreak 5783 \fi 5784 \box\delayedbox 5785\egroup 5786} 5787\newbox\delayedbox 5788\newbox\interbox 5789 5790% Used from \printindex. \firsttoken should be the first token 5791% after the \entry. If it's not another \entry, we are at the last 5792% line of a group of index entries, so insert a penalty to discourage 5793% widowed index entries. 5794\def\dotheinsertentryboxwithpenalty{% 5795 \ifx\firsttoken\isentry 5796 \else 5797 \penalty 9000 5798 \fi 5799 \insertentrybox 5800} 5801\def\isentry{\entry}% 5802 5803% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 5804% The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push 5805% the page number to the right. 5806\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 5807 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll} 5808 5809 5810\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 5811 5812\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm 5813\def\secondary#1#2{{% 5814 \parfillskip=0in 5815 \parskip=0in 5816 \hangindent=1in 5817 \hangafter=1 5818 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill 5819 \ifpdf 5820 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 5821 \else 5822 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 5823 #2 5824 \else 5825 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 5826 \fi 5827 \fi 5828 \par 5829}} 5830 5831% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 5832% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 5833% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 5834\catcode`\@=11 % private names 5835 5836\newbox\partialpage 5837\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 5838 5839\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 5840 % If not much space left on page, start a new page. 5841 \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi 5842 % 5843 % Grab any single-column material above us. 5844 \output = {% 5845 \savetopmark 5846 % 5847 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a 5848 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output 5849 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is 5850 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In 5851 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal 5852 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this 5853 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. 5854 \ifvoid\partialpage \else 5855 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% 5856 \fi 5857 % 5858 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 5859 % Unvbox the main output page. 5860 \unvbox\PAGE 5861 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 5862 }% 5863 }% 5864 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 5865 % 5866 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 5867 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 5868 % 5869 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 5870 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 5871 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 5872 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 5873 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 5874 % 5875 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 5876 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 5877 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 5878 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 5879 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 5880 % 5881 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 5882 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 5883 % been clobbered. 5884 % 5885 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 5886 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 5887 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 5888 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5889 % 5890 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 5891 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 5892 % previous page. 5893 \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage 5894 \vsize = 2\vsize 5895 % 5896 % For the benefit of balancing columns 5897 \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt 5898} 5899 5900% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 5901% the last, which is done by \balancecolumns. 5902% 5903\def\doublecolumnout{% 5904 % 5905 \savetopmark 5906 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 5907 \dimen@ = \vsize 5908 \divide\dimen@ by 2 5909 % 5910 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 5911 \setbox0=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ 5912 \global\advance\vsize by 2\ht\partialpage 5913 \onepageout\pagesofar % empty except for the first time we are called 5914 \unvbox\PAGE 5915 \penalty\outputpenalty 5916} 5917% 5918% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 5919% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 5920\def\pagesofar{% 5921 \unvbox\partialpage 5922 % 5923 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5924 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 5925 \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 5926} 5927 5928 5929% Finished with with double columns. 5930\def\enddoublecolumns{% 5931 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 5932 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 5933 % following situation: 5934 % 5935 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 5936 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 5937 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 5938 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 5939 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 5940 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 5941 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 5942 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 5943 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 5944 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 5945 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 5946 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 5947 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 5948 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 5949 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 5950 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 5951 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 5952 % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see 5953 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 5954 % 5955 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 5956 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 5957 \penalty0 5958 % 5959 \output = {% 5960 % Split the last of the double-column material. 5961 \savetopmark 5962 \balancecolumns 5963 }% 5964 \eject % call the \output just set 5965 \ifdim\pagetotal=0pt 5966 % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 5967 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 5968 % definition right away. 5969 \global\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput} 5970 % 5971 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 5972 % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic 5973 % page break. 5974 \box\balancedcolumns 5975 % 5976 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 5977 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 5978 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize. 5979 \global\vsize = \txipageheight % 5980 \pagegoal = \txipageheight % 5981 \else 5982 % We had some left-over material. This might happen when \doublecolumnout 5983 % is called in \balancecolumns. Try again. 5984 \expandafter\enddoublecolumns 5985 \fi 5986} 5987\newbox\balancedcolumns 5988\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}% 5989% 5990% Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout 5991% does the others. 5992\def\balancecolumns{% 5993 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox\PAGE}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 5994 \dimen@ = \ht0 5995 \ifdim\dimen@<7\baselineskip 5996 % Don't split a short final column in two. 5997 \setbox2=\vbox{}% 5998 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 5999 \else 6000 % double the leading vertical space 6001 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 6002 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 6003 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 6004 \dimen@ii = \dimen@ 6005 \splittopskip = \topskip 6006 % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column. 6007 {% 6008 \vbadness = 10000 6009 \loop 6010 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 6011 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 6012 \ifdim\ht1<\ht3 6013 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 6014 \repeat 6015 }% 6016 % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3. 6017 % 6018 % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself. 6019 % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so 6020 % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize). 6021 \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize 6022 % It appears that we have been called upon to balance too much material. 6023 % Output some of it with \doublecolumnout, leaving the rest on the page. 6024 \setbox\PAGE=\box0 6025 \doublecolumnout 6026 \else 6027 % Compare the heights of the two columns. 6028 \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3 6029 % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms 6030 % flush with each other. 6031 \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}% 6032 \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}% 6033 \else 6034 % Make column bottoms flush with each other. 6035 \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}% 6036 \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}% 6037 \fi 6038 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 6039 \fi 6040 \fi 6041 % 6042} 6043\catcode`\@ = \other 6044 6045 6046\message{sectioning,} 6047% Chapters, sections, etc. 6048 6049% Let's start with @part. 6050\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} 6051\def\partzzz#1{% 6052 \chapoddpage 6053 \null 6054 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit 6055 \begingroup 6056 \noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text 6057 \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with 6058 \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc 6059 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page 6060 % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter 6061 % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents. 6062 \let\pchapsepmacro\relax 6063 \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6064 \chapoddpage 6065 \endgroup 6066} 6067 6068% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered 6069% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 6070% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 6071% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 6072% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 6073\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 6074\newcount\chapno 6075\newcount\secno \secno=0 6076\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 6077\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 6078 6079% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 6080\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 6081% 6082% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 6083% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 6084% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 6085% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 6086% 6087\def\appendixletter{% 6088 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 6089 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 6090 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 6091 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 6092 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 6093 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 6094 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 6095 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 6096 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 6097 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 6098 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 6099 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 6100 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 6101 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 6102 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 6103 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 6104 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 6105 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 6106 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 6107 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 6108 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 6109 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 6110 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 6111 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 6112 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 6113 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 6114 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 6115 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 6116 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 6117 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 6118 \else\char\the\appendixno 6119 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 6120 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 6121 6122% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 6123% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 6124% these. @section does likewise. 6125\def\thischapter{} 6126\def\thischapternum{} 6127\def\thischaptername{} 6128\def\thissection{} 6129\def\thissectionnum{} 6130\def\thissectionname{} 6131 6132\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 6133\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 6134 6135% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 6136\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 6137\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name 6138 6139% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 6140\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 6141\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name 6142 6143% we only have subsub. 6144\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 6145% 6146% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 6147% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 6148\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel 6149% 6150% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 6151% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 6152\def\chapheadtype{N} 6153 6154% Choose a heading macro 6155% #1 is heading type 6156% #2 is heading level 6157% #3 is text for heading 6158\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 6159 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 6160 \absseclevel=#2 6161 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 6162 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 6163 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 6164 \absseclevel = 0 6165 \else 6166 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 6167 \absseclevel = 3 6168 \fi 6169 \fi 6170 % The heading type: 6171 \def\headtype{#1}% 6172 \if \headtype U% 6173 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel 6174 \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel 6175 \fi 6176 \else 6177 % Check for appendix sections: 6178 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 6179 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 6180 \else 6181 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 6182 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 6183 \fi\fi 6184 \fi 6185 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 6186 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel 6187 \def\headtype{U}% 6188 \else 6189 \chardef\unnlevel = 3 6190 \fi 6191 \fi 6192 % Now print the heading: 6193 \if \headtype U% 6194 \ifcase\absseclevel 6195 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 6196 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 6197 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6198 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6199 \fi 6200 \else 6201 \if \headtype A% 6202 \ifcase\absseclevel 6203 \appendixzzz{#3}% 6204 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 6205 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 6206 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6207 \fi 6208 \else 6209 \ifcase\absseclevel 6210 \chapterzzz{#3}% 6211 \or \seczzz{#3}% 6212 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6213 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6214 \fi 6215 \fi 6216 \fi 6217 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6218} 6219 6220% an interface: 6221\def\numhead{\genhead N} 6222\def\apphead{\genhead A} 6223\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 6224 6225% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 6226% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 6227% 6228% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 6229% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 6230\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6231% 6232\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 6233\def\chapterzzz#1{% 6234 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 6235 % as an @include file. 6236 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6237 \global\advance\chapno by 1 6238 % 6239 % Used for \float. 6240 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 6241 \resetallfloatnos 6242 % 6243 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. 6244 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% 6245 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% 6246 % 6247 % Write the actual heading. 6248 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 6249 % 6250 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 6251 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 6252 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6253 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6254} 6255 6256\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz 6257% 6258\def\appendixzzz#1{% 6259 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6260 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 6261 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 6262 \resetallfloatnos 6263 % 6264 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. 6265 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% 6266 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% 6267 % 6268 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 6269 % 6270 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 6271 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 6272 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 6273} 6274 6275% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: 6276\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} 6277\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 6278 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6279 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 6280 % 6281 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 6282 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6283 \resetallfloatnos 6284 % 6285 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 6286 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 6287 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 6288 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 6289 % to be executed, not expanded). 6290 % 6291 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 6292 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 6293 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 6294 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 6295 % the toc entries.) 6296 \toks0 = {#1}% 6297 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 6298 % 6299 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 6300 % 6301 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 6302 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 6303 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 6304} 6305 6306% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 6307\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 6308 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 6309 \unnmhead0{#1}% 6310 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6311} 6312 6313% @top is like @unnumbered. 6314\let\top\unnumbered 6315 6316% Sections. 6317% 6318\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 6319\def\seczzz#1{% 6320 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6321 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 6322} 6323 6324% normally calls appendixsectionzzz: 6325\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} 6326\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 6327 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6328 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 6329} 6330\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 6331 6332% normally calls unnumberedseczzz: 6333\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} 6334\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 6335 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6336 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 6337} 6338 6339% Subsections. 6340% 6341% normally calls numberedsubseczzz: 6342\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} 6343\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 6344 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6345 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6346} 6347 6348% normally calls appendixsubseczzz: 6349\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} 6350\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 6351 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6352 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 6353 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6354} 6355 6356% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: 6357\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} 6358\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 6359 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6360 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 6361 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6362} 6363 6364% Subsubsections. 6365% 6366% normally numberedsubsubseczzz: 6367\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} 6368\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6369 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6370 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 6371 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6372} 6373 6374% normally appendixsubsubseczzz: 6375\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} 6376\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 6377 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6378 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 6379 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6380} 6381 6382% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: 6383\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} 6384\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6385 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6386 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 6387 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6388} 6389 6390% These macros control what the section commands do, according 6391% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 6392% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 6393\let\section = \numberedsec 6394\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6395\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6396 6397% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 6398 6399\def\majorheading{% 6400 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 6401 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 6402} 6403 6404\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 6405\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 6406 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 6407 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 6408 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6409} 6410 6411% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 6412\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6413 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6414\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6415 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6416\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6417 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6418 6419% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 6420% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 6421% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 6422 6423% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 6424\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 6425 6426% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 6427\newskip\chapheadingskip 6428 6429% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. 6430\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 6431 6432% Start a new page 6433\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 6434 6435% \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter 6436% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 6437% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 6438% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 6439\def\chapoddpage{% 6440 \chappager 6441 \ifodd\pageno \else 6442 \begingroup 6443 \headingsoff 6444 \null 6445 \chappager 6446 \endgroup 6447 \fi 6448} 6449 6450\parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 6451 6452\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 6453\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6454\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 6455\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 6456 6457\def\CHAPPAGon{% 6458\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6459\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 6460\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 6461\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 6462 6463\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 6464\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 6465\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 6466\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 6467\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 6468 6469\CHAPPAGon 6470 6471% \chapmacro - Chapter opening. 6472% 6473% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 6474% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 6475% Not used for @heading series. 6476% 6477% To test against our argument. 6478\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 6479\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 6480\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 6481% 6482\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 6483 \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else 6484 \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment. 6485 \fi 6486 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6487 \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs 6488 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6489 \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6490 \gdef\thissection{}}% 6491 % 6492 \def\temptype{#2}% 6493 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6494 \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6495 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 6496 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6497 \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6498 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 6499 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6500 \toks0={#1}% 6501 \xdef\currentchapterdefs{% 6502 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6503 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 6504 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible 6505 % commands in some of the translations. 6506 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} 6507 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6508 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6509 }% 6510 \else 6511 \toks0={#1}% 6512 \xdef\currentchapterdefs{% 6513 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6514 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 6515 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible 6516 % commands in some of the translations. 6517 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} 6518 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6519 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6520 }% 6521 \fi\fi\fi 6522 % 6523 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6524 % the preceding space. 6525 \safewhatsit\domark 6526 % 6527 % Insert the chapter heading break. 6528 \pchapsepmacro 6529 % 6530 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6531 % between here and the heading. 6532 \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs 6533 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6534 \domark 6535 % 6536 {% 6537 \chapfonts \rm 6538 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message 6539 % 6540 % Have to define \currentsection before calling \donoderef, because the 6541 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 6542 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 6543 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6544 % 6545 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 6546 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 6547 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6548 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6549 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 6550 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6551 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 6552 \def\toctype{omit}% 6553 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6554 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 6555 \def\toctype{app}% 6556 \else 6557 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 6558 \def\toctype{numchap}% 6559 \fi\fi\fi 6560 % 6561 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 6562 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 6563 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 6564 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 6565 % 6566 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 6567 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 6568 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 6569 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 6570 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 6571 \donoderef{#2}% 6572 % 6573 % Typeset the actual heading. 6574 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 6575 \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 6576 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 6577 }% 6578 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 6579 \nobreak 6580} 6581 6582% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 6583\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6584\def\centerparameters{% 6585 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 6586 \leftskip = \rightskip 6587 \parfillskip = 0pt 6588} 6589 6590 6591% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 6592% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 6593% 6594\newskip\secheadingskip 6595\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 6596 6597% Subsection titles. 6598\newskip\subsecheadingskip 6599\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 6600 6601% Subsubsection titles. 6602\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 6603\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 6604 6605 6606% Print any size, any type, section title. 6607% 6608% #1 is the text of the title, 6609% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), 6610% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), 6611% #4 is the section number. 6612% 6613\def\seckeyword{sec} 6614% 6615\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 6616 {% 6617 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 6618 \def\temptype{#3}% 6619 % 6620 % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an 6621 % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is 6622 % dubious), but not the others. 6623 \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else 6624 \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment. 6625 \fi 6626 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading 6627 % 6628 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 6629 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 6630 % 6631 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6632 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6633 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6634 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6635 \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6636 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 6637 \fi 6638 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6639 % Don't redefine \thissection. 6640 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6641 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6642 \toks0={#1}% 6643 \xdef\currentsectiondefs{% 6644 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6645 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6646 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6647 % commands in some of the translations. 6648 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6649 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6650 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6651 }% 6652 \fi 6653 \else 6654 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6655 \toks0={#1}% 6656 \xdef\currentsectiondefs{% 6657 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6658 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6659 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6660 % commands in some of the translations. 6661 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6662 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6663 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6664 }% 6665 \fi 6666 \fi\fi\fi 6667 % 6668 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we 6669 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph 6670 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. 6671 \par 6672 % 6673 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6674 % the preceding space. 6675 \safewhatsit\domark 6676 % 6677 % Insert space above the heading. 6678 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 6679 % 6680 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6681 % between here and the heading. 6682 \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6683 \domark 6684 % 6685 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 6686 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6687 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6688 \def\toctype{unn}% 6689 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6690 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6691 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 6692 % and don't redefine \currentsection. 6693 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6694 \def\toctype{omit}% 6695 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 6696 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6697 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6698 \def\toctype{app}% 6699 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6700 \else 6701 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6702 \def\toctype{num}% 6703 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6704 \fi\fi\fi 6705 % 6706 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 6707 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 6708 % 6709 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 6710 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 6711 \donoderef{#3}% 6712 % 6713 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 6714 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 6715 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 6716 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 6717 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 6718 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 6719 \nobreak 6720 % 6721 % Output the actual section heading. 6722 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 6723 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 6724 \unhbox0 #1}% 6725 }% 6726 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 6727 % Don't allow stretch, though. 6728 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 6729 % 6730 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 6731 % was followed by glue. 6732 \nobreak 6733 % 6734 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 6735 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 6736 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next 6737 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out 6738 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically 6739 % obscuring the section heading with something else. 6740 \vskip-\parskip 6741 % 6742 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known 6743 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation 6744 % and do the needful. 6745 \penalty 10001 6746} 6747 6748 6749\message{toc,} 6750% Table of contents. 6751\newwrite\tocfile 6752 6753% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 6754% Called from @chapter, etc. 6755% 6756% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 6757% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 6758% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 6759% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 6760% destination to jump to. 6761% 6762% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 6763% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 6764% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 6765% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 6766% 6767\newif\iftocfileopened 6768\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 6769% 6770\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 6771 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 6772 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 6773 \iftocfileopened\else 6774 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 6775 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 6776 \fi 6777 % 6778 \iflinks 6779 {\atdummies 6780 \edef\temp{% 6781 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 6782 \temp 6783 }% 6784 \fi 6785 \fi 6786 % 6787 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 6788 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 6789 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 6790 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 6791 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 6792 % `1', and two named `2'. 6793 \ifpdf 6794 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6795 \else 6796 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 6797 \else 6798 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6799 \fi 6800 \fi 6801} 6802 6803 6804% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 6805% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 6806% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 6807% 6808\def\activecatcodes{% 6809 \catcode`\"=\active 6810 \catcode`\$=\active 6811 \catcode`\<=\active 6812 \catcode`\>=\active 6813 \catcode`\\=\active 6814 \catcode`\^=\active 6815 \catcode`\_=\active 6816 \catcode`\|=\active 6817 \catcode`\~=\active 6818} 6819 6820 6821% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 6822\def\readtocfile{% 6823 \setupdatafile 6824 \activecatcodes 6825 \input \tocreadfilename 6826} 6827 6828\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 6829\newcount\savepageno 6830\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 6831 6832% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 6833% 6834\def\startcontents#1{% 6835 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 6836 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 6837 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 6838 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> 6839 \contentsalignmacro 6840 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 6841 % 6842 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 6843 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 6844 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6845 % 6846 \savepageno = \pageno 6847 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 6848 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 6849 \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 6850 % 6851 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 6852 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 6853} 6854 6855% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 6856% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 6857% 6858\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 6859 6860% Normal (long) toc. 6861% 6862\def\contents{% 6863 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 6864 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6865 \ifeof 1 \else 6866 \readtocfile 6867 \fi 6868 \vfill \eject 6869 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6870 \ifeof 1 \else 6871 \pdfmakeoutlines 6872 \fi 6873 \closein 1 6874 \endgroup 6875 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6876 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6877} 6878 6879% And just the chapters. 6880\def\summarycontents{% 6881 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 6882 % 6883 \let\partentry = \shortpartentry 6884 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 6885 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 6886 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 6887 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 6888 \secfonts 6889 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 6890 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 6891 \rm 6892 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 6893 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 6894 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 6895 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 6896 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 6897 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6898 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6899 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6900 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6901 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6902 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6903 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6904 \ifeof 1 \else 6905 \readtocfile 6906 \fi 6907 \closein 1 6908 \vfill \eject 6909 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6910 \endgroup 6911 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6912 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6913} 6914\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 6915 6916% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 6917% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 6918% 6919\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 6920 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 6921 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 6922 % But use \hss just in case. 6923 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 6924 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 6925 % 6926 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 6927 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 6928 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 6929 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 6930 % there are before deciding ... 6931 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 6932} 6933 6934% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 6935% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 6936% The last argument is the page number. 6937% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 6938 6939% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't 6940% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. 6941% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. 6942\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} 6943\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{% 6944 % Add stretch and a bonus for breaking the page before the part heading. 6945 % This reduces the chance of the page being broken immediately after the 6946 % part heading, before a following chapter heading. 6947 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 6948 \penalty-300 6949 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 6950 \dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}% 6951} 6952% 6953% Parts, in the short toc. 6954\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% 6955 \penalty-300 6956 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip 6957 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% 6958} 6959 6960% Chapters, in the main contents. 6961\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6962 6963% Chapters, in the short toc. 6964% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 6965\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 6966 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 6967} 6968 6969% Appendices, in the main contents. 6970% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 6971% 6972\def\appendixbox#1{% 6973 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 6974 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 6975 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 6976% 6977\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}} 6978 6979% Unnumbered chapters. 6980\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 6981\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 6982 6983% Sections. 6984\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6985\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 6986\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 6987 6988% Subsections. 6989\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6990\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 6991\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6992 6993% And subsubsections. 6994\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6995\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 6996\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6997 6998% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 6999% Same as \defaultparindent. 7000\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 7001 7002% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 7003% page number. 7004% 7005% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 7006% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 7007\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 7008 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 7009 \begingroup 7010 % Move the page numbers slightly to the right 7011 \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em 7012 \chapentryfonts 7013 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7014 \endgroup 7015 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 7016} 7017 7018\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7019 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 7020 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7021\endgroup} 7022 7023\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7024 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 7025 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7026\endgroup} 7027 7028\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7029 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 7030 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7031\endgroup} 7032 7033% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 7034\let\tocentry = \entry 7035 7036% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 7037\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 7038 7039\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 7040\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 7041 7042\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 7043\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 7044\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 7045\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 7046 7047 7048\message{environments,} 7049% @foo ... @end foo. 7050 7051% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. 7052% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 7053% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. 7054 7055\envdef\tex{% 7056 \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% 7057 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 7058 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 7059 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 7060 \catcode `\%=14 7061 \catcode `\+=\other 7062 \catcode `\"=\other 7063 \catcode `\|=\other 7064 \catcode `\<=\other 7065 \catcode `\>=\other 7066 \catcode `\`=\other 7067 \catcode `\'=\other 7068 % 7069 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our 7070 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. 7071 \mathactive 7072 % 7073 % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file. 7074 \let\b=\ptexb 7075 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 7076 \let\c=\ptexc 7077 \let\,=\ptexcomma 7078 \let\.=\ptexdot 7079 \let\dots=\ptexdots 7080 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 7081 \let\!=\ptexexclam 7082 \let\i=\ptexi 7083 \let\indent=\ptexindent 7084 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7085 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 7086 \let\+=\tabalign 7087 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 7088 \let\/=\ptexslash 7089 \let\sp=\ptexsp 7090 \let\*=\ptexstar 7091 %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode 7092 \let\t=\ptext 7093 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer 7094 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 7095 % 7096 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 7097 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 7098 \def\@{@}% 7099} 7100% There is no need to define \Etex. 7101 7102% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 7103% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 7104% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 7105 7106% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 7107\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 7108 7109% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 7110% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 7111% have any width. 7112\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 7113 7114% This space is always present above and below environments. 7115\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 7116 7117% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 7118% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 7119% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 7120% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 7121% 7122\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 7123 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7124 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7125 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7126 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7127 \endgraf 7128 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7129 \removelastskip 7130 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7131 % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text 7132 % often leads into it. 7133 \penalty100 7134 \fi 7135 \vskip\envskipamount 7136 \fi 7137 \fi 7138}} 7139 7140\def\afterenvbreak{{% 7141 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7142 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7143 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7144 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7145 \endgraf 7146 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7147 \removelastskip 7148 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 7149 % or better ... 7150 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 7151 \vskip\envskipamount 7152 \fi 7153 \fi 7154}} 7155 7156% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 7157% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 7158\let\nonarrowing=\relax 7159 7160% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 7161% environment contents. 7162\font\circle=lcircle10 7163\newdimen\circthick 7164\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 7165\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 7166\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 7167% 7168\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 7169\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 7170\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 7171\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 7172\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7173 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 7174 \hskip\rskip}} 7175\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7176 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 7177 \hskip\rskip}} 7178% 7179\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 7180 7181\envdef\cartouche{% 7182 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 7183 \startsavinginserts 7184 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 7185 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 7186 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 7187 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 7188 \cartouter=\hsize 7189 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 7190 % side, and for 6pt waste from 7191 % each corner char, and rule thickness 7192 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 7193 % 7194 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the 7195 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can 7196 % collide with the section heading. 7197 \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi 7198 % 7199 \setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup 7200 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 7201 \carttop 7202 \hbox\bgroup 7203 \hskip\lskip 7204 \vrule\kern3pt 7205 \vbox\bgroup 7206 \kern3pt 7207 \hsize=\cartinner 7208 \baselineskip=\normbskip 7209 \lineskip=\normlskip 7210 \parskip=\normpskip 7211 \vskip -\parskip 7212 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. 7213} 7214\def\Ecartouche{% 7215 \ifhmode\par\fi 7216 \kern3pt 7217 \egroup 7218 \kern3pt\vrule 7219 \hskip\rskip 7220 \egroup 7221 \cartbot 7222 \egroup 7223 \addgroupbox 7224 \checkinserts 7225} 7226 7227 7228% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 7229% inside a group. 7230\newdimen\nonfillparindent 7231\def\nonfillstart{% 7232 \aboveenvbreak 7233 \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy 7234 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 7235 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 7236 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 7237 \parskip = 0pt 7238 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate 7239 % the normal \indent. 7240 \nonfillparindent=\parindent 7241 \parindent = 0pt 7242 \let\indent\nonfillindent 7243 % 7244 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 7245 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7246 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7247 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 7248 \else 7249 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7250 \fi 7251 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 7252} 7253 7254\begingroup 7255\obeyspaces 7256% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake 7257% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally 7258% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after 7259% @indent. 7260\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% 7261\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% 7262\ifx\temp % 7263\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% 7264\else% 7265\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% 7266\fi% 7267}% 7268\endgroup 7269\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} 7270\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} 7271 7272% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 7273% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 7274% This affects the following displayed environments: 7275% @example, @display, @format, @lisp 7276% 7277\def\smallword{small} 7278\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 7279\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 7280\def\setnormaldispenv{% 7281 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 7282 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 7283 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 7284 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 7285 % to change the fonts afterward. 7286 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7287 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7288 \fi 7289} 7290\def\setsmalldispenv{% 7291 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 7292 \else 7293 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7294 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7295 \fi 7296} 7297 7298% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 7299% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. 7300\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% 7301 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% 7302 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% 7303 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7304 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7305} 7306 7307% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. 7308\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% 7309 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% 7310 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% 7311} 7312% 7313% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; 7314% @example: same as @lisp. 7315% 7316% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 7317% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 7318% 7319\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% 7320 \nonfillstart 7321 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% 7322 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 7323 \gobble % eat return 7324} 7325% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 7326% 7327\makedispenvdef{display}{% 7328 \nonfillstart 7329 \gobble 7330} 7331 7332% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 7333% 7334\makedispenvdef{format}{% 7335 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7336 \nonfillstart 7337 \gobble 7338} 7339 7340% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 7341\envdef\flushleft{% 7342 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7343 \nonfillstart 7344 \gobble 7345} 7346\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 7347 7348% @flushright. 7349% 7350\envdef\flushright{% 7351 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7352 \nonfillstart 7353 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax 7354 \gobble 7355} 7356\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 7357 7358 7359% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right 7360% justification. From plain.tex. 7361\envdef\raggedright{% 7362 \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax 7363} 7364\let\Eraggedright\par 7365 7366\envdef\raggedleft{% 7367 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em 7368 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7369 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7370 % badness reporting. 7371} 7372\let\Eraggedleft\par 7373 7374\envdef\raggedcenter{% 7375 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em 7376 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7377 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7378 % badness reporting. 7379} 7380\let\Eraggedcenter\par 7381 7382 7383% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 7384% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 7385% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 7386% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 7387% 7388\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} 7389% 7390\def\quotationstart{% 7391 \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too. 7392 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7393 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 7394 \fi 7395 \parsearg\quotationlabel 7396} 7397 7398% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 7399% doing normal filling. 7400% 7401\def\Equotation{% 7402 \par 7403 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else 7404 % indent a bit. 7405 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 7406 \fi 7407 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7408} 7409\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} 7410 7411% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 7412\def\quotationlabel#1{% 7413 \def\temp{#1}% 7414 \ifx\temp\empty \else 7415 {\bf #1: }% 7416 \fi 7417} 7418 7419% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and 7420% has no optional argument. 7421% 7422\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart} 7423% 7424\def\indentedblockstart{% 7425 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 7426 \parindent=0pt 7427 % 7428 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 7429 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7430 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7431 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 7432 \else 7433 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7434 \fi 7435} 7436 7437% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling. 7438% 7439\def\Eindentedblock{% 7440 \par 7441 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7442} 7443\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock} 7444 7445 7446% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 7447% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 7448% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 7449% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 7450% 7451% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 7452% 7453% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 7454% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 7455% verbatim line. 7456\def\dospecials{% 7457 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 7458 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 7459 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 7460 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and 7461 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and 7462 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. 7463 %\do\`\do\'% 7464} 7465% 7466% [Knuth] p. 380 7467\def\uncatcodespecials{% 7468 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 7469% 7470% Setup for the @verb command. 7471% 7472% Eight spaces for a tab 7473\begingroup 7474 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7475 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 7476\endgroup 7477% 7478\def\setupverb{% 7479 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7480 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 7481 \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% 7482 \tabeightspaces 7483 % Respect line breaks, 7484 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7485 % make each space count 7486 % must do in this order: 7487 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7488} 7489 7490% Setup for the @verbatim environment 7491% 7492% Real tab expansion. 7493\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 7494% 7495% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle 7496% tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent, 7497% or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the 7498% entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before 7499% it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands 7500% (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself. 7501\newbox\verbbox 7502\def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} 7503% 7504\begingroup 7505 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7506 \gdef\tabexpand{% 7507 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7508 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 7509 \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab 7510 \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw 7511 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 7512 \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 7513 \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox 7514 }% 7515 } 7516\endgroup 7517 7518% start the verbatim environment. 7519\def\setupverbatim{% 7520 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7521 \nonfillstart 7522 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7523 % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would 7524 % never \starttabbox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode. 7525 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}% 7526 \tabexpand 7527 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% 7528 % Respect line breaks, 7529 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7530 % make each space count. 7531 % Must do in this order: 7532 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7533 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 7534} 7535 7536% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 7537% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 7538% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 7539% 7540% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 7541% 7542% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 7543\begingroup 7544 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 7545 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 7546\endgroup 7547% 7548\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 7549% 7550% 7551% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 7552% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 7553% 7554% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 7555% 7556% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 7557% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 7558% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 7559% 7560% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 7561% 7562\begingroup 7563 \catcode`\ =\active 7564 \obeylines % 7565 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 7566 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 7567 % line in the output. 7568 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 7569 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 7570 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 7571\endgroup 7572% 7573\envdef\verbatim{% 7574 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 7575} 7576\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 7577 7578 7579% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 7580% 7581\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 7582% 7583\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 7584 {% 7585 \makevalueexpandable 7586 \setupverbatim 7587 {% 7588 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 7589 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% 7590 \edef\tmp{\noexpand\input #1 } 7591 \expandafter 7592 }\tmp 7593 \afterenvbreak 7594 }% 7595} 7596 7597% @copying ... @end copying. 7598% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 7599% 7600% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 7601% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 7602% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 7603% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 7604% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 7605% possible is desirable. 7606% 7607\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 7608\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 7609% 7610\def\insertcopying{% 7611 \begingroup 7612 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 7613 \scanexp\copyingtext 7614 \endgroup 7615} 7616 7617 7618\message{defuns,} 7619% @defun etc. 7620 7621\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 7622\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 7623\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 7624\newcount\defunpenalty 7625 7626% Start the processing of @deffn: 7627\def\startdefun{% 7628 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7629 \medbreak 7630 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 7631 % following @def command, see below. 7632 \else 7633 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 7634 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 7635 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 7636 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 7637 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 7638 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 7639 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 7640 % 7641 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 7642 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 7643 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 7644 % @def command. 7645 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7646 % 7647 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 7648 % But do insert the glue. 7649 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 7650 \fi 7651 % 7652 \parindent=0in 7653 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 7654 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7655} 7656 7657\def\dodefunx#1{% 7658 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 7659 \checkenv#1% 7660 % 7661 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 7662 % It's not a great place, though. 7663 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7664 % 7665 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 7666 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 7667} 7668\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 7669 7670% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 7671% 7672\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 7673 \begingroup 7674 % call \deffnheader: 7675 #1#2 \endheader 7676 % common ending: 7677 \interlinepenalty = 10000 7678 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax 7679 \endgraf 7680 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 7681 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 7682 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 7683 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 7684 \checkparencounts 7685 \endgroup 7686} 7687 7688\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 7689 7690% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 7691% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 7692% 7693\def\makedefun#1{% 7694 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 7695 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 7696 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 7697 \temp 7698} 7699 7700% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) } 7701% 7702% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 7703% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 7704% 7705\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 7706 \envdef#1{% 7707 \startdefun 7708 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else 7709 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 7710 }% 7711 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 7712 \def#3% 7713} 7714 7715\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? 7716\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? 7717 7718% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions 7719% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, 7720% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. 7721% 7722\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% 7723 \def\temp{#1}% 7724 \ifx\temp\onword 7725 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7726 = \empty 7727 \else\ifx\temp\offword 7728 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7729 = \relax 7730 \else 7731 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7732 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', 7733 must be on|off}% 7734 \fi\fi 7735} 7736 7737% \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 7738% 7739% If SUBTOPIC is present, precede it with a space, and call \doind. 7740% (At some time during the 20th century, this made a two-level entry in an 7741% index such as the operation index. Nobody seemed to notice the change in 7742% behaviour though.) 7743\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 7744 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 7745 \ifx\thirdarg\empty 7746 \doind{#1}{#2}% 7747 \else 7748 \doind{#1}{#2\space#3}% 7749 \fi 7750} 7751 7752% Untyped functions: 7753 7754% @deffn category name args 7755\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 7756 7757% @deffn category class name args 7758\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7759 7760% \defopon {category on}class name args 7761\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7762 7763% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 7764% 7765\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 7766 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 7767 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 7768} 7769 7770% Typed functions: 7771 7772% @deftypefn category type name args 7773\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 7774 7775% @deftypeop category class type name args 7776\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7777 7778% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 7779\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7780 7781% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 7782% 7783\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7784 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7785 \doingtypefntrue 7786 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7787} 7788 7789% Typed variables: 7790 7791% @deftypevr category type var args 7792\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 7793 7794% @deftypecv category class type var args 7795\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7796 7797% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 7798\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7799 7800% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 7801% 7802\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7803 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7804 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7805} 7806 7807% Untyped variables: 7808 7809% @defvr category var args 7810\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 7811 7812% @defcv category class var args 7813\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7814 7815% \defcvof {category of}class var args 7816\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 7817 7818% Types: 7819 7820% @deftp category name args 7821\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 7822 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 7823 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 7824} 7825 7826% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 7827\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7828\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 7829\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 7830\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7831\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7832\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 7833\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7834\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 7835\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 7836\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7837\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7838 7839% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 7840% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 7841% #2 is the return type, if any. 7842% #3 is the function name. 7843% 7844% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 7845% 7846\def\defname#1#2#3{% 7847 \par 7848 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 7849 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 7850 % 7851 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function 7852 % on a line by itself. 7853 \rettypeownlinefalse 7854 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? 7855 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: 7856 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else 7857 \rettypeownlinetrue 7858 \fi 7859 \fi 7860 % 7861 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps 7862 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 7863 % just below it. 7864 \def\temp{#1}% 7865 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 7866 % 7867 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at 7868 % least two. 7869 \tempnum = 2 7870 % 7871 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 7872 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 7873 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 7874 % 7875 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. 7876 \ifrettypeownline 7877 \advance\tempnum by 1 7878 \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% 7879 \else 7880 \def\maybeshapeline{}% 7881 \fi 7882 % 7883 % The continuations: 7884 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 7885 % 7886 % The final paragraph shape: 7887 \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 7888 % 7889 % Put the category name at the right margin. 7890 \noindent 7891 \hbox to 0pt{% 7892 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 7893 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 7894 \kern\leftskip 7895 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 7896 }% 7897 % 7898 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 7899 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 7900 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7901 {% 7902 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 7903 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 7904 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 7905 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 7906 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 7907 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 7908 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 7909 % one has made identifiers using them :). 7910 \df \tt 7911 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type 7912 \ifx\temp\empty\else 7913 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type 7914 \ifrettypeownline 7915 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: 7916 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break 7917 \else 7918 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space 7919 \fi 7920 \fi % no return type 7921 #3% output function name 7922 }% 7923 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont 7924 % 7925 \boldbrax 7926 % arguments will be output next, if any. 7927} 7928 7929% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 7930% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 7931% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 7932% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 7933% 7934\def\defunargs#1{% 7935 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 7936 % tt for the names. 7937 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 7938 % 7939 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 7940 % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so 7941 % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter. 7942 % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen 7943 % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`. 7944 \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% 7945 #1% 7946 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 7947} 7948 7949% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 7950% 7951\def\activeparens{% 7952 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 7953 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 7954 \catcode`\&=\active 7955} 7956 7957% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 7958\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 7959 7960% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 7961% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 7962% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 7963{ 7964 \activeparens 7965 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 7966 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 7967 \global\let& = \& 7968 7969 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 7970 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 7971} 7972\let\ampchar\& 7973 7974\newcount\parencount 7975 7976% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 7977\newif\ifampseen 7978\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 7979 7980\def\parenfont{% 7981 \ifampseen 7982 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 7983 % otherwise use the default font. 7984 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 7985 \else 7986 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 7987 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 7988 \sf 7989 \fi 7990} 7991\def\infirstlevel#1{% 7992 \ifampseen 7993 \ifnum\parencount=1 7994 #1% 7995 \fi 7996 \fi 7997} 7998\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 7999 8000\def\opnr{% 8001 \global\advance\parencount by 1 8002 {\parenfont(}% 8003 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 8004} 8005\def\clnr{% 8006 {\parenfont)}% 8007 \infirstlevel \sl 8008 \global\advance\parencount by -1 8009} 8010 8011\newcount\brackcount 8012\def\lbrb{% 8013 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 8014 {\bf[}% 8015} 8016\def\rbrb{% 8017 {\bf]}% 8018 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 8019} 8020 8021\def\checkparencounts{% 8022 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 8023 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 8024} 8025% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 8026% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 8027\def\badparencount{% 8028 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 8029 \global\parencount=0 8030} 8031\def\badbrackcount{% 8032 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 8033 \global\brackcount=0 8034} 8035 8036 8037\message{macros,} 8038% @macro. 8039 8040% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 8041% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 8042\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8043 \newwrite\macscribble 8044 \def\scantokens#1{% 8045 \toks0={#1}% 8046 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 8047 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 8048 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 8049 \input \jobname.tmp 8050 } 8051\fi 8052 8053% alias because \c means cedilla in @tex or @math 8054\let\texinfoc=\c 8055 8056\newcount\savedcatcodeone 8057\newcount\savedcatcodetwo 8058 8059% Used at the time of macro expansion. 8060% Argument is macro body with arguments substituted 8061\def\scanmacro#1{% 8062 \newlinechar`\^^M 8063 \def\xeatspaces{\eatspaces}% 8064 % 8065 % Temporarily undo catcode changes of \printindex. Set catcode of @ to 8066 % 0 so that @-commands in macro expansions aren't printed literally when 8067 % formatting an index file, where \ is used as the escape character. 8068 \savedcatcodeone=\catcode`\@ 8069 \savedcatcodetwo=\catcode`\\ 8070 \catcode`\@=0 8071 \catcode`\\=\active 8072 % 8073 % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime. 8074 \scantokens{#1@texinfoc}% 8075 % 8076 \catcode`\@=\savedcatcodeone 8077 \catcode`\\=\savedcatcodetwo 8078 % 8079 % The \texinfoc is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and 8080 % can be noticed by \parsearg. 8081 % We avoid surrounding the call to \scantokens with \bgroup and \egroup 8082 % to allow macros to open or close groups themselves. 8083} 8084 8085% Used for copying and captions 8086\def\scanexp#1{% 8087 \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}% 8088} 8089 8090\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 8091\newtoks\macname % Macro name 8092\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 8093 8094% List of all defined macros in the form 8095% \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2... 8096% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 8097% if there is a need. 8098\def\macrolist{} 8099 8100% Add the macro to \macrolist 8101\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 8102\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 8103 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}% 8104 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 8105} 8106 8107% Utility routines. 8108% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 8109% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 8110% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 8111% 8112\def\cslet#1#2{% 8113 \expandafter\let 8114 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 8115 \csname#2\endcsname 8116} 8117 8118% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 8119% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 8120{\catcode`\@=11 8121\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 8122\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 8123\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 8124\def\unbrace#1{#1} 8125\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 8126} 8127 8128% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 8129{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 8130\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 8131\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 8132\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 8133} 8134 8135% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 8136% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 8137% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ 8138% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. 8139% 8140% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 8141% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 8142% confine the change to the current group. 8143% 8144% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 8145% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 8146% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 8147% 8148\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine 8149 \catcode`\"=\other 8150 \catcode`\+=\other 8151 \catcode`\<=\other 8152 \catcode`\>=\other 8153 \catcode`\^=\other 8154 \catcode`\_=\other 8155 \catcode`\|=\other 8156 \catcode`\~=\other 8157 \passthroughcharstrue 8158} 8159 8160\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. 8161 \scanctxt 8162 \catcode`\@=\other 8163 \catcode`\\=\other 8164 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8165} 8166 8167\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions 8168 \scanctxt 8169 \catcode`\ =\other 8170 \catcode`\@=\other 8171 \catcode`\{=\other 8172 \catcode`\}=\other 8173 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8174 \usembodybackslash 8175} 8176 8177% Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode 8178% changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside 8179% an argument to another Texinfo command. 8180\def\macroargctxt{% 8181 \scanctxt 8182 \catcode`\ =\active 8183 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8184 \catcode`\\=\active 8185} 8186 8187\def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces 8188 \scanctxt 8189 \catcode`\{=\other 8190 \catcode`\}=\other 8191} 8192 8193% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 8194% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 8195% where N is the macro parameter number. 8196% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 8197% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 8198% 8199{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 8200 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 8201 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 8202} 8203\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 8204 8205\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } 8206 8207\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 8208\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 8209 8210\def\macroxxx#1{% 8211 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 8212 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 8213 \paramno=0\relax 8214 \else 8215 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 8216 \if\paramno>256\relax 8217 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8218 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8219 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} 8220 \fi 8221 \fi 8222 \fi 8223 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 8224 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 8225 \else 8226 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 8227 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 8228 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 8229 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 8230 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 8231 \fi 8232 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 8233 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 8234 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 8235 \fi} 8236 8237\parseargdef\unmacro{% 8238 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 8239 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 8240 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 8241 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 8242 \begingroup 8243 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 8244 \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo 8245 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 8246 \endgroup 8247 \else 8248 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 8249 \fi 8250} 8251 8252% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 8253% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 8254% 8255\def\unmacrodo#1{% 8256 \ifx #1\relax 8257 % remove this 8258 \else 8259 \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1% 8260 \fi 8261} 8262 8263% \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to 8264% the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list. 8265\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 8266\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 8267\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 8268\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 8269% This made use of the feature that if the last token of a 8270% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 8271% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 8272 8273% Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro. 8274% Set \paramno to the number of arguments, 8275% and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a 8276% three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params 8277% list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are 8278% less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N 8279% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be 8280% defined `a la TeX in the macro body. 8281% 8282% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 8283% 8284% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see 8285% \parsemmanyargdef. 8286% 8287\def\parsemargdef#1;{% 8288 \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 8289 \let\hash\relax 8290 % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions 8291 \let\xeatspaces\relax 8292 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% 8293 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else 8294 \paramno0\relax 8295 \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments 8296 \fi 8297} 8298\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 8299 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8300 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 8301 \advance\paramno by 1 8302 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 8303 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 8304 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 8305 \fi\next} 8306 8307% \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody 8308% 8309% Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since 8310% rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 8311% 8312% We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro 8313% body to be transformed. 8314% Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro. 8315% 8316{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{% 8317\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8318{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{% 8319\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8320 8321% Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names. 8322\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} 8323\catcode `@=11\relax 8324 8325%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8326 8327% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the 8328% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is 8329% processed again to replace the arguments. 8330% 8331% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the 8332% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of 8333% the catcode regime under which the body was input). 8334% 8335% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more 8336% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error). 8337% 8338% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments 8339% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to 8340% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list 8341% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments 8342% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining 8343% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. 8344\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% 8345 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8346 \else 8347 \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ 8348 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% 8349 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa 8350 \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% 8351 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we 8352 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an 8353 % \xdef . 8354 \expandafter\edef\tempa 8355 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% 8356 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8357 \fi\next} 8358 8359 8360\let\endargs@\relax 8361\let\nil@\relax 8362\def\nilm@{\nil@}% 8363\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% 8364 8365% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its 8366% definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros 8367% macarg.ARGNAME 8368% 8369% #1 is the macro name 8370% #2 is the list of argument names 8371% #3 is the list of argument values 8372\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% 8373 \def\macargdeflist@{}% 8374 \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. 8375 \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% 8376 \def\macroname{#1}% 8377 \begingroup 8378 \macroargctxt 8379 \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% 8380 \def\@tempa{#3}% 8381 \ifx\@tempa\empty 8382 \setemptyargvalues@ 8383 \else 8384 \getargvals@@ 8385 \fi 8386} 8387\def\getargvals@@{% 8388 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8389 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. 8390 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8391 \else 8392 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8393 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% 8394 \fi 8395 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8396 \else 8397 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8398 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg 8399 % macros to empty. 8400 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8401 \else 8402 % pop current arg name into \@tempb 8403 \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% 8404 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% 8405 % pop current argument value into \@tempc 8406 \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% 8407 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% 8408 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. 8409 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd 8410 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8411 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax 8412 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% 8413 \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% 8414 \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% 8415 \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ 8416 \let\next\getargvals@@ 8417 \fi 8418 \fi 8419 \next 8420} 8421 8422\def\push@#1#2{% 8423 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def 8424 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% 8425 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% 8426 \expandafter#1#2}% 8427} 8428 8429% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result 8430% in macro \@tempa. 8431% 8432\def\macvalstoargs@{% 8433 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed 8434 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument 8435 % values into respective token registers. 8436 % 8437 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. 8438 \begingroup 8439 \paramno0\relax 8440 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument 8441 % value into a new token list register \toks#N 8442 \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% 8443 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their 8444 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they 8445 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . 8446 \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% 8447 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers 8448 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after 8449 % group. 8450 \expandafter 8451 \endgroup 8452 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8453 } 8454 8455% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 8456% 8457\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 8458 \expandafter 8459 \endgroup 8460 \macargdeflist@ 8461 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result 8462 % is in \@tempa . 8463 \macvalstoargs@ 8464 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value 8465 % with \@tempb . 8466 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname 8467 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing 8468 % \egroup . 8469 \ifx\@tempb\gobble 8470 \let\@tempc\relax 8471 \else 8472 \let\@tempc\egroup 8473 \fi 8474 % And now we do the real job: 8475 \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% 8476 \@tempd 8477} 8478 8479\def\putargsintokens@#1,{% 8480 \if#1;\let\next\relax 8481 \else 8482 \let\next\putargsintokens@ 8483 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary 8484 % alias \@tempb . 8485 \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno 8486 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. 8487 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname 8488 \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% 8489 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8490 \fi 8491 \next 8492} 8493 8494% Trailing missing arguments are set to empty. 8495% 8496\def\setemptyargvalues@{% 8497 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8498 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8499 \else 8500 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ 8501 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8502 \fi 8503 \next 8504} 8505 8506\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% 8507 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% 8508 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% 8509 \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ 8510 \def\paramlist{#2}% 8511} 8512 8513% #1 is the element target macro 8514% #2 is the list macro 8515% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value 8516\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8517 \def#1{#3}% 8518 \def#2{#4}% 8519} 8520\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8521 \long\def#1{#3}% 8522 \long\def#2{#4}% 8523} 8524 8525 8526%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8527 8528 8529% This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody. 8530% \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for 8531% its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}". 8532% \paramno is the number of parameters 8533% \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3," 8534% There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. 8535% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 8536% they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group. 8537% 8538\def\defmacro{% 8539 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 8540 \ifnum\paramno=1 8541 \def\xeatspaces##1{##1}% 8542 % This removes the pair of braces around the argument. We don't 8543 % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost 8544 % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based 8545 % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly. 8546 \else 8547 \let\xeatspaces\relax % suppress expansion 8548 \fi 8549 \ifcase\paramno 8550 % 0 8551 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8552 \bgroup 8553 \noexpand\spaceisspace 8554 \noexpand\endlineisspace 8555 \noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name. 8556 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8557 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{% 8558 \egroup 8559 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8560 \or % 1 8561 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8562 \bgroup 8563 \noexpand\braceorline 8564 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8565 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8566 \egroup 8567 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}% 8568 }% 8569 \else % at most 9 8570 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax 8571 % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument 8572 % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a 8573 % comma. 8574 % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list. 8575 % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted. 8576 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8577 \bgroup 8578 \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the 8579 \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space. 8580 \noexpand\expandafter 8581 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}% 8582 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{% 8583 \noexpand\passargtomacro 8584 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}% 8585 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8586 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}% 8587 \expandafter\expandafter 8588 \expandafter\xdef 8589 \expandafter\expandafter 8590 \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{% 8591 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8592 \else % 10 or more: 8593 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8594 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 8595 }% 8596 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody 8597 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble 8598 \fi 8599 \fi} 8600 8601\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes 8602 8603\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 8604 8605 8606%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8607% 8608{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape 8609@catcode`@_=11 % private names 8610@catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator 8611 8612% \passargtomacro#1#2 - 8613% Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2 8614% compressed to one. 8615% 8616% This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use 8617% \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where 8618% complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to 8619% an auxiliary file for an index entry). 8620% 8621% State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to 8622% @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is 8623% 8624% THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input) 8625% 8626% where: 8627% THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call 8628% ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro 8629% PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing 8630% NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next 8631 8632@gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{% 8633 @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\% 8634} 8635@gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax 8636 8637% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8638% #2 - PENDING_BS 8639% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8640% #4 used to look ahead 8641% 8642% If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument; 8643% otherwise, remove the next token. 8644@gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{% 8645 @ifx#4\% 8646 @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish 8647 @else 8648 @expandafter@add_segment 8649 @fi#1!{#2}#4#4% 8650} 8651 8652% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8653% #2 - PENDING_BS 8654% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8655% #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled. 8656% #5 looks ahead 8657% 8658% Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead. 8659@gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{% 8660 @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5% 8661} 8662 8663@gdef@is_fi{@fi} 8664 8665% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8666% #2 - PENDING_BS 8667% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8668% #4 is input stream until next backslash 8669% 8670% Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a 8671% backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash. 8672% NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish, 8673% finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until 8674% the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent 8675% a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been 8676% added to ARG_RESULT. 8677@gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{% 8678@ifx#3@_finish 8679 @call_the_macro#1!% 8680@else 8681 % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment 8682 @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi 8683 % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead. 8684 % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how 8685 % long #4 is. 8686} 8687 8688% #1 - THE_MACRO 8689% #2 - ARG_RESULT 8690% #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the 8691% conditional. 8692@gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}} 8693 8694} 8695%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8696 8697% \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks 8698% whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context 8699% for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then, 8700% to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular 8701% \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC. 8702% 8703\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 8704\def\braceorlinexxx{% 8705 \ifx\nchar\bgroup 8706 \macroargctxt 8707 \expandafter\passargtomacro 8708 \else 8709 \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg 8710 \fi \macnamexxx} 8711 8712 8713% @alias. 8714% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 8715% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 8716% 8717\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 8718\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 8719\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 8720 {% 8721 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 8722 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 8723 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 8724 }% 8725 \next 8726} 8727 8728 8729\message{cross references,} 8730 8731\newwrite\auxfile 8732\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 8733\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 8734 8735% @inforef is relatively simple. 8736\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 8737\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% 8738 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 8739 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 8740 8741% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 8742% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 8743% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 8744% @node foo , bar , ... 8745% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 8746% 8747\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 8748% 8749% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 8750% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 8751\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 8752\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} 8753 8754\let\nwnode=\node 8755\let\lastnode=\empty 8756 8757% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 8758% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 8759% 8760\def\donoderef#1{% 8761 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 8762 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 8763 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 8764 \fi 8765} 8766 8767% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 8768% 8769\newcount\savesfregister 8770% 8771\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 8772\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 8773\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 8774 8775% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 8776% anchor), which consists of three parts: 8777% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \currentsection, 8778% or the anchor name. 8779% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 8780% empty for anchors. 8781% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 8782% 8783% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 8784% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 8785% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 8786% 8787\def\setref#1#2{% 8788 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 8789 \iflinks 8790 {% 8791 \requireauxfile 8792 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 8793 % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX. 8794 \def\value##1{##1}% 8795 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 8796 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 8797 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 8798 }% 8799 \toks0 = \expandafter{\currentsection}% 8800 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 8801 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 8802 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout 8803 }% 8804 \fi 8805} 8806 8807% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used 8808% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. 8809% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title 8810% variable, now it's official. 8811% 8812\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% 8813 \def\temp{#1}% 8814 \ifx\temp\onword 8815 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8816 = \empty 8817 \else\ifx\temp\offword 8818 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8819 = \relax 8820 \else 8821 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8822 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', 8823 must be on|off}% 8824 \fi\fi 8825} 8826 8827% 8828% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 8829% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 8830% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 8831% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 8832% 8833\def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX} 8834\def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX} 8835\def\ref{\xrefXX} 8836 8837\def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX} 8838\def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]} 8839% 8840\newbox\toprefbox 8841\newbox\printedrefnamebox 8842\newbox\infofilenamebox 8843\newbox\printedmanualbox 8844% 8845\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 8846 \unsepspaces 8847 % 8848 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces. 8849 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 8850 \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 8851 % 8852 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}% 8853 \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}% 8854 % 8855 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 8856 \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 8857 % 8858 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in 8859 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use. 8860 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8861 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 8862 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax 8863 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets. 8864 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8865 \else 8866 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside 8867 % the square brackets if we have it. 8868 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8869 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name. 8870 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8871 \else 8872 \ifhavexrefs 8873 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values. 8874 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 8875 \else 8876 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 8877 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8878 \fi% 8879 \fi 8880 \fi 8881 \fi 8882 % 8883 % Make link in pdf output. 8884 \ifpdf 8885 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 8886 {\indexnofonts 8887 \makevalueexpandable 8888 \turnoffactive 8889 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8890 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8891 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8892 \getfilename{#4}% 8893 % 8894 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8895 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8896 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8897 % 8898 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8899 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8900 \fi 8901 % 8902 \leavevmode 8903 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 8904 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8905 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}% 8906 \else 8907 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}% 8908 \fi 8909 }% 8910 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8911 \else 8912 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 8913 \else 8914 % For XeTeX 8915 {\indexnofonts 8916 \makevalueexpandable 8917 \turnoffactive 8918 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8919 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8920 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8921 \getfilename{#4}% 8922 % 8923 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8924 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8925 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8926 % 8927 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8928 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8929 \fi 8930 % 8931 \leavevmode 8932 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8933 % With default settings, 8934 % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers. 8935 % In this case, the replaced destination names of 8936 % remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement, 8937 % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 8938 % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+), 8939 % this command line option is no longer necessary 8940 % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special. 8941 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8942 << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8943 \else 8944 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8945 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8946 \fi 8947 }% 8948 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8949 \fi 8950 \fi 8951 {% 8952 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 8953 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 8954 \indexnofonts 8955 \turnoffactive 8956 \def\value##1{##1}% 8957 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 8958 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 8959 }% 8960 % 8961 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 8962 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by 8963 % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string. 8964 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 8965 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 8966 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 8967 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8968 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 8969 \else 8970 \printedrefname 8971 \fi 8972 % 8973 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 8974 % "in MANUALNAME". 8975 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8976 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 8977 \fi 8978 \else 8979 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 8980 % 8981 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert 8982 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not 8983 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 8984 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, 8985 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name 8986 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 8987 % 8988 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8989 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name. 8990 % 8991 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}% 8992 % 8993 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt 8994 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no 8995 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as 8996 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else. 8997 % 8998 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}% 8999 % 9000 \else 9001 % Reference within this manual. 9002 % 9003 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 9004 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 9005 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 9006 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 9007 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 9008 {\turnoffactive 9009 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 9010 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 9011 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 9012 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 9013 }% 9014 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden. 9015 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 9016 % 9017 % But we always want a comma and a space: 9018 ,\space 9019 % 9020 % output the `page 3'. 9021 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 9022 % Add a , if xref followed by a space 9023 \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,% 9024 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB 9025 \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @* 9026 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE 9027 \else\ifx\ 9028 \tokenafterxref ,% @NL 9029 \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie 9030 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 9031 \fi\fi 9032 \fi 9033 \endlink 9034\endgroup} 9035 9036% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice). 9037% 9038% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither 9039% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply 9040% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual. 9041% 9042% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the 9043% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in 9044% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less 9045% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g., 9046% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice. 9047% 9048% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every 9049% reference, since the current font is indeterminate. 9050% 9051\def\crossmanualxref#1{% 9052 \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}% 9053 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}% 9054 \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty? 9055 \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top? 9056 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space 9057 \fi 9058 \fi 9059 #1% 9060} 9061 9062% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 9063% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 9064% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 9065% one that Bob is working on :). 9066% 9067\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 9068 9069% Things referred to by \setref. 9070% 9071\def\Ynothing{} 9072\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 9073\def\Ynumbered{% 9074 \ifnum\secno=0 9075 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 9076 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9077 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 9078 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9079 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9080 \else 9081 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9082 \fi\fi\fi 9083} 9084\def\Yappendix{% 9085 \ifnum\secno=0 9086 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 9087 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9088 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 9089 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9090 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9091 \else 9092 \putwordSection@tie 9093 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9094 \fi\fi\fi 9095} 9096 9097% \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME. SUFFIX 9098% is output afterwards if non-empty. 9099\def\refx#1#2{% 9100 \requireauxfile 9101 {% 9102 \indexnofonts 9103 \otherbackslash 9104 \def\value##1{##1}% 9105 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 9106 \csname XR#1\endcsname 9107 }% 9108 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 9109 % If not defined, say something at least. 9110 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 9111 \iflinks 9112 \ifhavexrefs 9113 {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value 9114 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% 9115 \else 9116 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 9117 \global\warnedxrefstrue 9118 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 9119 \fi 9120 \fi 9121 \fi 9122 \else 9123 % It's defined, so just use it. 9124 \thisrefX 9125 \fi 9126 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 9127} 9128 9129% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control 9130% sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence 9131% name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float 9132% type, we have more work to do. 9133% 9134\def\xrdef#1#2{% 9135 {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences. 9136 % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands 9137 % like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition. 9138 \indexnofonts 9139 \turnoffactive 9140 \def\value##1{##1}% 9141 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 9142 }% 9143 % 9144 \bgroup 9145 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% 9146 \egroup 9147 % We put the \gdef inside a group to avoid the definitions building up on 9148 % TeX's save stack, which can cause it to run out of space for aux files with 9149 % thousands of lines. \gdef doesn't use the save stack, but \csname does 9150 % when it defines an unknown control sequence as \relax. 9151 % 9152 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 9153 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 9154 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 9155 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 9156 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 9157 % 9158 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 9159 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 9160 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 9161 \else 9162 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 9163 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 9164 \fi 9165 % 9166 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 9167 % for later use in \listoffloats. 9168 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 9169 {\safexrefname}}% 9170 \fi 9171} 9172 9173% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 9174% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 9175% This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file. 9176% 9177\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 9178\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 9179 9180% Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it. 9181\def\requireauxfile{% 9182 \iflinks 9183 \tryauxfile 9184 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 9185 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 9186 \fi 9187 \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once. 9188} 9189 9190% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 9191% 9192\def\tryauxfile{% 9193 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 9194 \ifeof 1 \else 9195 \readdatafile{aux}% 9196 \global\havexrefstrue 9197 \fi 9198 \closein 1 9199} 9200 9201\def\setupdatafile{% 9202 \catcode`\^^@=\other 9203 \catcode`\^^A=\other 9204 \catcode`\^^B=\other 9205 \catcode`\^^C=\other 9206 \catcode`\^^D=\other 9207 \catcode`\^^E=\other 9208 \catcode`\^^F=\other 9209 \catcode`\^^G=\other 9210 \catcode`\^^H=\other 9211 \catcode`\^^K=\other 9212 \catcode`\^^L=\other 9213 \catcode`\^^N=\other 9214 \catcode`\^^P=\other 9215 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 9216 \catcode`\^^R=\other 9217 \catcode`\^^S=\other 9218 \catcode`\^^T=\other 9219 \catcode`\^^U=\other 9220 \catcode`\^^V=\other 9221 \catcode`\^^W=\other 9222 \catcode`\^^X=\other 9223 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 9224 \catcode`\^^[=\other 9225 \catcode`\^^\=\other 9226 \catcode`\^^]=\other 9227 \catcode`\^^^=\other 9228 \catcode`\^^_=\other 9229 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. 9230 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't 9231 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, 9232 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ 9233 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat 9234 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first 9235 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could 9236 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. 9237 % 9238 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: 9239 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter 9240 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. 9241 % 9242 \catcode`\^=\other 9243 % 9244 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 9245 \catcode`\~=\other 9246 \catcode`\[=\other 9247 \catcode`\]=\other 9248 \catcode`\"=\other 9249 \catcode`\_=\other 9250 \catcode`\|=\other 9251 \catcode`\<=\other 9252 \catcode`\>=\other 9253 \catcode`\$=\other 9254 \catcode`\#=\other 9255 \catcode`\&=\other 9256 \catcode`\%=\other 9257 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 9258 % 9259 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ 9260 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than 9261 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ 9262 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* 9263 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that 9264 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for 9265 % now. --karl, 15jan04. 9266 \catcode`\\=\other 9267 % 9268 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 9269 \catcode`\{=1 9270 \catcode`\}=2 9271 \catcode`\@=0 9272} 9273 9274\def\readdatafile#1{% 9275\begingroup 9276 \setupdatafile 9277 \input\jobname.#1 9278\endgroup} 9279 9280 9281\message{insertions,} 9282% including footnotes. 9283 9284\newcount \footnoteno 9285 9286% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 9287% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 9288% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 9289% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 9290% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 9291\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 9292 9293% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. 9294\let\footnotestyle=\comment 9295 9296{\catcode `\@=11 9297% 9298% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 9299\gdef\footnote{% 9300 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 9301 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 9302 % 9303 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 9304 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 9305 \let\@sf\empty 9306 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 9307 % 9308 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 9309 \unskip 9310 \thisfootno\@sf 9311 \dofootnote 9312}% 9313 9314% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 9315% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 9316% 9317% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 9318% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 9319% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 9320% 9321\gdef\dofootnote{% 9322 \insert\footins\bgroup 9323 % 9324 % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot 9325 % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.) 9326 \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest 9327 % 9328 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 9329 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 9330 % So reset some parameters. 9331 \hsize=\txipagewidth 9332 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 9333 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 9334 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 9335 \floatingpenalty\@MM 9336 \leftskip\z@skip 9337 \rightskip\z@skip 9338 \spaceskip\z@skip 9339 \xspaceskip\z@skip 9340 \parindent\defaultparindent 9341 % 9342 \smallfonts \rm 9343 % 9344 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 9345 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 9346 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 9347 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 9348 \let\noindent = \relax 9349 % 9350 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 9351 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 9352 \everypar = {\hang}% 9353 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 9354 % 9355 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 9356 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 9357 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 9358 \footstrut 9359 % 9360 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. 9361 \futurelet\next\fo@t 9362} 9363}%end \catcode `\@=11 9364 9365\def\errfootnotenest{% 9366 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9367 \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex, 9368 even though they work in makeinfo; sorry} 9369} 9370 9371\def\errfootnoteheading{% 9372 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9373 \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported} 9374} 9375 9376% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 9377% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 9378% would be lost. 9379% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 9380% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 9381% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 9382% 9383% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 9384% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 9385% out prematurely. 9386% 9387\def\startsavinginserts{% 9388 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 9389 \let\insert\saveinsert 9390 \else 9391 \let\checkinserts\relax 9392 \fi 9393} 9394 9395% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 9396% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 9397% 9398\def\saveinsert#1{% 9399 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 9400 \afterassignment\next 9401 % swallow the left brace 9402 \let\temp = 9403} 9404\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 9405\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 9406 9407\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 9408 9409\def\placesaveins#1{% 9410 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 9411 {\box#1}% 9412} 9413 9414% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 9415{ 9416 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 9417 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 9418} 9419 9420% initialization: 9421\def\newsaveins #1{% 9422 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 9423 \next 9424} 9425\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 9426 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 9427 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 9428 \checksaveins #1}% 9429} 9430 9431% initialize: 9432\let\checkinserts\empty 9433\newsaveins\footins 9434\newsaveins\margin 9435 9436 9437% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 9438% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 9439% 9440% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 9441% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 9442% undone and the next image would fail. 9443\openin 1 = epsf.tex 9444\ifeof 1 \else 9445 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 9446 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 9447 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 9448 \input epsf.tex 9449\fi 9450\closein 1 9451% 9452% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 9453\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 9454\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 9455 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 9456 it from https://ctan.org/texarchive/macros/texinfo/texinfo/doc/epsf.tex.} 9457% 9458\def\image#1{% 9459 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined 9460 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 9461 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 9462 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 9463 \global\warnednoepsftrue 9464 \fi 9465 \else 9466 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 9467 \fi 9468} 9469% 9470% Arguments to @image: 9471% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 9472% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 9473% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 9474% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 9475% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. 9476\newif\ifimagevmode 9477\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 9478 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 9479 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 9480 \def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}% in case we are being used via a macro 9481 % If the image is by itself, center it. 9482 \ifvmode 9483 \imagevmodetrue 9484 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV 9485 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space 9486 \imagevmodetrue 9487 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev 9488 \fi\fi 9489 % 9490 \ifimagevmode 9491 \nobreak\medskip 9492 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 9493 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 9494 % above and below. 9495 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 9496 \nobreak 9497 \fi 9498 % 9499 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 9500 % environment such as @quotation is respected. 9501 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the 9502 % normal paragraph indentation. 9503 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't 9504 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and 9505 % eradicate the centering. 9506 \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi 9507 % 9508 % Output the image. 9509 \ifpdf 9510 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80 9511 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9512 \else 9513 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9514 % For epsf.tex 9515 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 9516 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 9517 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 9518 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 9519 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 9520 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 9521 \else 9522 % For XeTeX 9523 \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9524 \fi 9525 \fi 9526 % 9527 \ifimagevmode 9528 \medskip % space after a standalone image 9529 \fi 9530 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi 9531\endgroup} 9532 9533 9534% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 9535% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 9536% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 9537% 9538\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 9539 9540% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 9541\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 9542 9543% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 9544% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 9545% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 9546% 9547% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 9548% be referable. 9549% 9550% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 9551% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 9552% 9553% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 9554% chapter-level command. 9555\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 9556% 9557\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 9558 \let\thiscaption=\empty 9559 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 9560 % 9561 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 9562 % 9563 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 9564 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 9565 % 9566 \startsavinginserts 9567 % 9568 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 9569 \par 9570 % 9571 \vtop\bgroup 9572 \def\floattype{#1}% 9573 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 9574 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 9575 % 9576 \ifx\floattype\empty 9577 \let\safefloattype=\empty 9578 \else 9579 {% 9580 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9581 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9582 \indexnofonts 9583 \turnoffactive 9584 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9585 }% 9586 \fi 9587 % 9588 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 9589 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9590 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 9591 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 9592 % 9593 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 9594 \global\advance\floatno by 1 9595 % 9596 {% 9597 % This magic value for \currentsection is output by \setref as the 9598 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 9599 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 9600 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 9601 % lists of floats. 9602 % 9603 \edef\currentsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 9604 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 9605 }% 9606 \fi 9607 % 9608 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 9609 \vskip\parskip 9610 % 9611 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 9612 \restorefirstparagraphindent 9613} 9614 9615% we have these possibilities: 9616% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 9617% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 9618% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 9619% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 9620% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 9621% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 9622% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 9623% @float & no caption: 9624% 9625\def\Efloat{% 9626 \let\floatident = \empty 9627 % 9628 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 9629 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 9630 % 9631 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 9632 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9633 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 9634 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 9635 \fi 9636 % the number. 9637 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9638 \fi 9639 % 9640 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 9641 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 9642 \let\captionline = \floatident 9643 % 9644 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 9645 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 9646 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 9647 \fi 9648 % 9649 % caption text. 9650 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 9651 \fi 9652 % 9653 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 9654 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 9655 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 9656 \vskip.5\parskip 9657 \captionline 9658 % 9659 % Space below caption. 9660 \vskip\parskip 9661 \fi 9662 % 9663 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 9664 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 9665 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9666 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 9667 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 9668 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 9669 {% 9670 \requireauxfile 9671 \atdummies 9672 % 9673 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 9674 \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}% 9675 \else 9676 \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}% 9677 \fi 9678 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 9679 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 9680 }% 9681 \fi 9682 \egroup % end of \vtop 9683 % 9684 \checkinserts 9685} 9686 9687% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 9688% 9689\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 9690 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 9691} 9692 9693% @caption, @shortcaption 9694% 9695\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 9696\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 9697\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 9698\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 9699 9700% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 9701% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 9702\def\getfloatno#1{% 9703 \ifx#1\relax 9704 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 9705 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 9706 % 9707 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 9708 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 9709 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 9710 \fi 9711 \let\floatno#1% 9712} 9713 9714% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 9715% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 9716% first read the @float command. 9717% 9718\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9719 9720% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 9721% distinguish floats from other xref types. 9722\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 9723 9724% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 9725% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 9726% \currentsection value which we \setref above. 9727% 9728\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 9729% 9730% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 9731% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 9732% 9733\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 9734 \def\temp{#1}% 9735 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 9736 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 9737} 9738 9739% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 9740% 9741\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 9742 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 9743 {% 9744 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9745 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9746 \indexnofonts 9747 \turnoffactive 9748 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9749 }% 9750 % 9751 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 9752 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 9753 \ifhavexrefs 9754 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 9755 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 9756 \fi 9757 \else 9758 \begingroup 9759 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 9760 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 9761 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 9762 \endgroup 9763 \fi 9764} 9765 9766% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 9767% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 9768% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 9769% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 9770% 9771% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 9772% they won't appear in the aux file). 9773% 9774\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 9775\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 9776 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 9777 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 9778 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 9779 % in pdf output. 9780 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 9781 % 9782 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 9783 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 9784 \writeentry 9785}} 9786 9787 9788\message{localization,} 9789 9790% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very 9791% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language 9792% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. 9793% 9794{ 9795 \catcode`\_ = \active 9796 \globaldefs=1 9797\parseargdef\documentlanguage{% 9798 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 9799 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 9800 \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test 9801 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9802 \ifeof 1 9803 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish 9804 \else 9805 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9806 \input txi-#1.tex 9807 \fi 9808 \closein 1 9809 \endgroup % end raw TeX 9810} 9811% 9812% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 9813% try txi-de.tex. 9814% 9815\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 9816 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9817 \ifeof 1 9818 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 9819 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 9820 \else 9821 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9822 \input txi-#1.tex 9823 \fi 9824 \closein 1 9825} 9826}% end of special _ catcode 9827% 9828\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 9829is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current 9830directory should work if nowhere else does.} 9831 9832% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the 9833% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and 9834% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. 9835% 9836% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. 9837% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., 9838% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. 9839% 9840% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all 9841% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in 9842% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the 9843% accented characters problem.) 9844% 9845\catcode`@=11 9846\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% 9847 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. 9848 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax 9849 \message{no patterns for #1}% 9850 \else 9851 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname 9852 \fi 9853 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. 9854 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax 9855 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax 9856} 9857 9858% XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively. 9859% Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation. 9860% Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise. 9861% 9862\newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable 9863\newif\iftxiusebytewiseio 9864 9865\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9866 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9867 \txinativeunicodecapablefalse 9868 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9869 \else 9870 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9871 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9872 \fi 9873\else 9874 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9875 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9876\fi 9877 9878% Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex 9879% for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings. 9880% 9881\def\setbytewiseio{% 9882 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9883 \else 9884 \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read 9885 \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file 9886 % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for 9887 % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files. 9888 % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in 9889 % place of non-ASCII characters. 9890 \fi 9891 9892 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9893 \else 9894 \directlua{ 9895 local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub 9896 local function convert_char (char) 9897 return utf8_char(byte(char)) 9898 end 9899 9900 local function convert_line (line) 9901 return gsub(line, ".", convert_char) 9902 end 9903 9904 callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line) 9905 9906 local function convert_line_out (line) 9907 local line_out = "" 9908 for c in string.utfvalues(line) do 9909 line_out = line_out .. string.char(c) 9910 end 9911 return line_out 9912 end 9913 9914 callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out) 9915 } 9916 \fi 9917 9918 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9919} 9920 9921 9922% Helpers for encodings. 9923% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 9924% 9925\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 9926 \count255=128 9927 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9928 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 9929 \advance\count255 by 1 9930 \repeat 9931} 9932 9933\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 9934 \count255=128 9935 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9936 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 9937 \advance\count255 by 1 9938 \repeat 9939} 9940 9941% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 9942% according to the specified encoding. 9943% 9944\def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz} 9945\def\documentencodingzzz#1{% 9946 % 9947 % Encoding being declared for the document. 9948 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 9949 % 9950 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 9951 % to compare them with \ifx. 9952 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 9953 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 9954 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 9955 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 9956 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 9957 % 9958 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9959 \asciichardefs 9960 % 9961 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 9962 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9963 \setbytewiseio 9964 \fi 9965 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9966 \lattwochardefs 9967 % 9968 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 9969 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9970 \setbytewiseio 9971 \fi 9972 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9973 \latonechardefs 9974 % 9975 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 9976 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9977 \setbytewiseio 9978 \fi 9979 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9980 \latninechardefs 9981 % 9982 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9983 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9984 % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) 9985 \nativeunicodechardefs 9986 \else 9987 % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX) 9988 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9989 % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level 9990 % (below), do not re-invoke it, otherwise our check for duplicated 9991 % definitions gets triggered. Making non-ascii chars active is 9992 % sufficient. 9993 \fi 9994 % 9995 \else 9996 \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}% 9997 % 9998 \fi % utfeight 9999 \fi % latnine 10000 \fi % latone 10001 \fi % lattwo 10002 \fi % ascii 10003 % 10004 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 10005 \else 10006 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 10007 \else 10008 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 10009 \else 10010 \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle % 10011 non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}% 10012 \fi 10013 \fi 10014 \fi 10015} 10016 10017% emacs-page 10018% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 10019% the default font encoding (OT1). 10020% 10021\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}} 10022 10023% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 10024\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 10025 10026% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 10027% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 10028% macros containing the character definitions. 10029\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 10030% 10031 10032\def\gdefchar#1#2{% 10033\gdef#1{% 10034 \ifpassthroughchars 10035 \string#1% 10036 \else 10037 #2% 10038 \fi 10039}} 10040 10041% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 10042\def\latonechardefs{% 10043 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10044 \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown} 10045 \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent 10046 \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}} 10047 \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency 10048 \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen 10049 \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar 10050 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10051 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10052 \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}} 10053 \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf} 10054 \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}} 10055 \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot} 10056 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10057 \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}} 10058 \gdefchar^^af{\={}} 10059 % 10060 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree} 10061 \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$} 10062 \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$} 10063 \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$} 10064 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10065 \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$} 10066 \gdefchar^^b6{\P} 10067 \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot} 10068 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10069 \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$} 10070 \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm} 10071 \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}} 10072 \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$} 10073 \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$} 10074 \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$} 10075 \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown} 10076 % 10077 \gdefchar^^c0{\`A} 10078 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10079 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10080 \gdefchar^^c3{\~A} 10081 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10082 \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A} 10083 \gdefchar^^c6{\AE} 10084 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10085 \gdefchar^^c8{\`E} 10086 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10087 \gdefchar^^ca{\^E} 10088 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10089 \gdefchar^^cc{\`I} 10090 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10091 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10092 \gdefchar^^cf{\"I} 10093 % 10094 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10095 \gdefchar^^d1{\~N} 10096 \gdefchar^^d2{\`O} 10097 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10098 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10099 \gdefchar^^d5{\~O} 10100 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10101 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10102 \gdefchar^^d8{\O} 10103 \gdefchar^^d9{\`U} 10104 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10105 \gdefchar^^db{\^U} 10106 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10107 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10108 \gdefchar^^de{\TH} 10109 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10110 % 10111 \gdefchar^^e0{\`a} 10112 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10113 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10114 \gdefchar^^e3{\~a} 10115 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10116 \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a} 10117 \gdefchar^^e6{\ae} 10118 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10119 \gdefchar^^e8{\`e} 10120 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10121 \gdefchar^^ea{\^e} 10122 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10123 \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 10124 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 10125 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 10126 \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 10127 % 10128 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10129 \gdefchar^^f1{\~n} 10130 \gdefchar^^f2{\`o} 10131 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10132 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10133 \gdefchar^^f5{\~o} 10134 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10135 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10136 \gdefchar^^f8{\o} 10137 \gdefchar^^f9{\`u} 10138 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10139 \gdefchar^^fb{\^u} 10140 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10141 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10142 \gdefchar^^fe{\th} 10143 \gdefchar^^ff{\"y} 10144} 10145 10146% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 10147\def\latninechardefs{% 10148 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 10149 \latonechardefs 10150 % 10151 \gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}} 10152 \gdefchar^^a6{\v S} 10153 \gdefchar^^a8{\v s} 10154 \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z} 10155 \gdefchar^^b8{\v z} 10156 \gdefchar^^bc{\OE} 10157 \gdefchar^^bd{\oe} 10158 \gdefchar^^be{\"Y} 10159} 10160 10161% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 10162\def\lattwochardefs{% 10163 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10164 \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}} 10165 \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}} 10166 \gdefchar^^a3{\L} 10167 \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 10168 \gdefchar^^a5{\v L} 10169 \gdefchar^^a6{\'S} 10170 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10171 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10172 \gdefchar^^a9{\v S} 10173 \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S} 10174 \gdefchar^^ab{\v T} 10175 \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z} 10176 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10177 \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z} 10178 \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z} 10179 % 10180 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree{}} 10181 \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}} 10182 \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }} 10183 \gdefchar^^b3{\l} 10184 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10185 \gdefchar^^b5{\v l} 10186 \gdefchar^^b6{\'s} 10187 \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}} 10188 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10189 \gdefchar^^b9{\v s} 10190 \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s} 10191 \gdefchar^^bb{\v t} 10192 \gdefchar^^bc{\'z} 10193 \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}} 10194 \gdefchar^^be{\v z} 10195 \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z} 10196 % 10197 \gdefchar^^c0{\'R} 10198 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10199 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10200 \gdefchar^^c3{\u A} 10201 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10202 \gdefchar^^c5{\'L} 10203 \gdefchar^^c6{\'C} 10204 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10205 \gdefchar^^c8{\v C} 10206 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10207 \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}} 10208 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10209 \gdefchar^^cc{\v E} 10210 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10211 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10212 \gdefchar^^cf{\v D} 10213 % 10214 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10215 \gdefchar^^d1{\'N} 10216 \gdefchar^^d2{\v N} 10217 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10218 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10219 \gdefchar^^d5{\H O} 10220 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10221 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10222 \gdefchar^^d8{\v R} 10223 \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U} 10224 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10225 \gdefchar^^db{\H U} 10226 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10227 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10228 \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T} 10229 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10230 % 10231 \gdefchar^^e0{\'r} 10232 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10233 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10234 \gdefchar^^e3{\u a} 10235 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10236 \gdefchar^^e5{\'l} 10237 \gdefchar^^e6{\'c} 10238 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10239 \gdefchar^^e8{\v c} 10240 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10241 \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}} 10242 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10243 \gdefchar^^ec{\v e} 10244 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} 10245 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} 10246 \gdefchar^^ef{\v d} 10247 % 10248 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10249 \gdefchar^^f1{\'n} 10250 \gdefchar^^f2{\v n} 10251 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10252 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10253 \gdefchar^^f5{\H o} 10254 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10255 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10256 \gdefchar^^f8{\v r} 10257 \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u} 10258 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10259 \gdefchar^^fb{\H u} 10260 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10261 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10262 \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t} 10263 \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 10264} 10265 10266% UTF-8 character definitions. 10267% 10268% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 10269% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 10270% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 10271% 10272\newcount\countUTFx 10273\newcount\countUTFy 10274\newcount\countUTFz 10275 10276\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 10277 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 10278% 10279\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 10280 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 10281% 10282\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 10283 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 10284 10285\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 10286 \ifx #1\relax 10287 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 10288 \else 10289 \expandafter #1% 10290 \fi 10291} 10292 10293% Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences 10294\begingroup 10295 \catcode`\~13 10296 \catcode`\$12 10297 \catcode`\"12 10298 10299 % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp 10300 % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value. 10301 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 10302 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 10303 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 10304 \uccode`\$\countUTFx 10305 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 10306 \advance\countUTFx by 1 10307 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 10308 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 10309 \fi} 10310 10311 % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to 10312 % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files. 10313 \countUTFx = "80 10314 \countUTFy = "C2 10315 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10316 \gdef~{% 10317 \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}% 10318 \UTFviiiLoop 10319 10320 \countUTFx = "C2 10321 \countUTFy = "E0 10322 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10323 \gdef~{% 10324 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10325 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10326 \UTFviiiLoop 10327 10328 \countUTFx = "E0 10329 \countUTFy = "F0 10330 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10331 \gdef~{% 10332 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10333 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10334 \UTFviiiLoop 10335 10336 \countUTFx = "F0 10337 \countUTFy = "F4 10338 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10339 \gdef~{% 10340 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10341 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi 10342 }}% 10343 \UTFviiiLoop 10344\endgroup 10345 10346\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below 10347 10348% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it. 10349\def\U#1{% 10350 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax 10351 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 10352 % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is 10353 % active. However, if the font does not have the glyph, 10354 % letters are missing. 10355 \begingroup 10356 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 10357 \uppercase{.} 10358 \endgroup 10359 \else 10360 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10361 \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}% 10362 \fi 10363 \else 10364 \csname uni:#1\endcsname 10365 \fi 10366} 10367 10368% These macros are used here to construct the name of a control 10369% sequence to be defined. 10370\def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{% 10371 \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}% 10372\def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{% 10373 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}% 10374\def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{% 10375 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}% 10376 10377% For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX), 10378% provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character; 10379% this gets used by the @U command 10380% 10381\begingroup 10382 \catcode`\"=12 10383 \catcode`\<=12 10384 \catcode`\.=12 10385 \catcode`\,=12 10386 \catcode`\;=12 10387 \catcode`\!=12 10388 \catcode`\~=13 10389 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{% 10390 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 10391 \begingroup 10392 \parseXMLCharref 10393 10394 % Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's 10395 % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g. 10396 % 10397 % 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2 10398 % 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname 10399 % 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token) 10400 % 10401 \expandafter\expandafter 10402 \expandafter\expandafter 10403 \expandafter\expandafter 10404 \expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 10405 % 10406 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else 10407 \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}% 10408 \fi 10409 % 10410 % define an additional control sequence for this code point. 10411 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp 10412 \endgroup} 10413 % 10414 % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp 10415 % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence. 10416 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 10417 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 10418 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10419 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 10420 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 10421 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10422 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,% 10423 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 10424 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10425 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10426 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}% 10427 \else 10428 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10429 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10430 \parseUTFviiiA!% 10431 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}% 10432 \fi\fi\fi 10433 } 10434 10435 % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx. 10436 % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence. 10437 % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one 10438 % of the bytes. 10439 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 10440 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 10441 \divide\countUTFz by 64 10442 \countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz. 10443 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 10444 10445 % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract 10446 % in order to get the last five bits. 10447 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 10448 10449 % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence. 10450 \advance\countUTFx by 128 10451 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 10452 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 10453 10454 % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp 10455 % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8 10456 % sequence. 10457 % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros. 10458 % #3 is always a full stop (.) 10459 % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these 10460 % bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's. 10461 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 10462 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 10463 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 10464 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 10465\endgroup 10466 10467% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 10468% provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally 10469% 10470\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{% 10471 \catcode"#1=\other 10472} 10473 10474% https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M 10475% U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block) 10476% U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block) 10477% U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A 10478% U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B 10479% 10480% Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing 10481% characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts 10482% awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without 10483% reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years, 10484% plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else. 10485% We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at 10486% least make most of the characters not bomb out. 10487% 10488\def\unicodechardefs{% 10489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}% 10490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}% 10491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent 10492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}% 10493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency 10494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen 10495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar 10496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}% 10497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}% 10498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}% 10499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}% 10500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}% 10501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}% 10502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}% 10503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}% 10504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}% 10505 % 10506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}% 10507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}% 10508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}% 10509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}% 10510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}% 10511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}% 10512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}% 10513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 10514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}% 10515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}% 10516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}% 10517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}% 10518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}% 10519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}% 10520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}% 10521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}% 10522 % 10523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}% 10524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}% 10525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}% 10526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}% 10527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}% 10528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}% 10529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}% 10530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}% 10531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}% 10532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}% 10533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}% 10534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}% 10535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}% 10536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}% 10537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}% 10538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}% 10539 % 10540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}% 10541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}% 10542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}% 10543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}% 10544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}% 10545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}% 10546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}% 10547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}% 10548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}% 10549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}% 10550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}% 10551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}% 10552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}% 10553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}% 10554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}% 10555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}% 10556 % 10557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}% 10558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}% 10559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}% 10560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}% 10561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}% 10562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}% 10563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}% 10564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}% 10565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}% 10566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}% 10567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}% 10568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}% 10569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}% 10570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}% 10571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}% 10572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}% 10573 % 10574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}% 10575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}% 10576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}% 10577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}% 10578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}% 10579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}% 10580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}% 10581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}% 10582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}% 10583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}% 10584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}% 10585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}% 10586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}% 10587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}% 10588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}% 10589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}% 10590 % 10591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}% 10592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}% 10593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}% 10594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}% 10595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}% 10596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}% 10597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}% 10598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}% 10599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}% 10600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}% 10601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}% 10602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}% 10603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}% 10604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}% 10605 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}% 10606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}% 10607 % 10608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}% 10609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}% 10610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}% 10611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}% 10612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}% 10613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}% 10614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}% 10615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}% 10616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}% 10617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}% 10618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}% 10619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}% 10620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}% 10621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}% 10622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}% 10623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}% 10624 % 10625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}% 10626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}% 10627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}% 10628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}% 10629 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}% 10630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}% 10631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}% 10634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}% 10635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}% 10636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}% 10637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}% 10638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}% 10639 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}% 10640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}% 10641 % 10642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}% 10643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}% 10644 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}% 10645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}% 10646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}% 10647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}% 10648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}% 10649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}% 10650 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10651 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}% 10652 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}% 10653 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}% 10654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}% 10655 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern 10656 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern 10657 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}% 10658 % 10659 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}% 10660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}% 10661 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}% 10662 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}% 10663 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}% 10664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}% 10665 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}% 10666 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}% 10667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}% 10668 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}% 10669 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}% 10670 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}% 10671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}% 10672 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}% 10673 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}% 10674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}% 10675 % 10676 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}% 10677 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}% 10678 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}% 10679 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}% 10680 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}% 10681 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}% 10682 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}% 10683 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}% 10684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}% 10685 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}% 10686 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}% 10687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}% 10688 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}% 10689 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}% 10690 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}% 10691 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}% 10692 % 10693 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}% 10694 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}% 10695 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}% 10696 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}% 10697 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}% 10698 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}% 10699 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10701 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}% 10702 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}% 10703 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}% 10704 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}% 10705 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}% 10706 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}% 10707 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}% 10708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}% 10709 % 10710 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}% 10711 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}% 10712 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}% 10713 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}% 10714 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}% 10715 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}% 10716 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}% 10717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}% 10718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}% 10719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}% 10720 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}% 10721 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}% 10722 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}% 10723 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}% 10724 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}% 10725 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}% 10726 % 10727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}% 10728 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}% 10729 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}% 10730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}% 10731 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}% 10732 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}% 10733 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}% 10734 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}% 10735 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}% 10736 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}% 10737 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}% 10738 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}% 10739 % 10740 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}% 10741 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}% 10742 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}% 10743 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}% 10744 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}% 10745 % 10746 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}% 10747 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}% 10748 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}% 10749 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}% 10750 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}% 10751 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}% 10752 % 10753 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}% 10754 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}% 10755 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}% 10756 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}% 10757 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}% 10758 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}% 10759 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}% 10760 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}% 10761 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}% 10762 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}% 10763 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}% 10764 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}% 10765 % 10766 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}% 10767 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}% 10768 % 10769 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}% 10770 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}% 10771 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}% 10772 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}% 10773 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}% 10774 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}% 10775 % 10776 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}% 10777 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}% 10778 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}% 10779 % 10780 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}% 10781 % 10782 % Greek letters upper case 10783 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}% 10784 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}% 10785 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}% 10786 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}% 10787 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}% 10788 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}% 10789 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}% 10790 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}% 10791 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}% 10792 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}% 10793 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}% 10794 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}% 10795 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}% 10796 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}% 10797 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}% 10798 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}% 10799 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}% 10800 %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma 10801 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}% 10802 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}% 10803 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}% 10804 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}% 10805 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}% 10806 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}% 10807 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}% 10808 % 10809 % Vowels with accents 10810 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}% 10811 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}% 10812 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}% 10813 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}% 10814 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}% 10815 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}% 10816 % 10817 % Standalone accent 10818 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}% 10819 % 10820 % Greek letters lower case 10821 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}% 10822 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}% 10823 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}% 10824 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}% 10825 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}% 10826 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}% 10827 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}% 10828 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}% 10829 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}% 10830 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10831 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}% 10832 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}% 10833 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}% 10834 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}% 10835 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron 10836 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}% 10837 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}% 10838 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}% 10839 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}% 10840 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}% 10841 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}% 10842 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}% 10843 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}% 10844 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}% 10845 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}% 10846 % 10847 % More Greek vowels with accents 10848 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}% 10849 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}% 10850 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}% 10851 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}% 10852 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}% 10853 % 10854 % Variant Greek letters 10855 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}% 10856 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}% 10857 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}% 10858 % 10859 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}% 10860 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}% 10861 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}% 10862 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}% 10863 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}% 10864 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}% 10865 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}% 10866 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}% 10867 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}% 10868 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}% 10869 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}% 10870 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}% 10871 % 10872 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}% 10873 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}% 10874 % 10875 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}% 10876 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}% 10877 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}% 10878 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}% 10879 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}% 10880 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}% 10881 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}% 10882 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}% 10883 % 10884 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}% 10885 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}% 10886 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}% 10887 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}% 10888 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}% 10889 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}% 10890 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}% 10891 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}% 10892 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}% 10893 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}% 10894 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}% 10895 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}% 10896 % 10897 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}% 10898 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}% 10899 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}% 10900 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}% 10901 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}% 10902 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}% 10903 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}% 10904 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}% 10905 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}% 10906 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}% 10907 % 10908 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}% 10909 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}% 10910 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}% 10911 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}% 10912 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}% 10913 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}% 10914 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}% 10915 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}% 10916 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}% 10917 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}% 10918 % 10919 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}% 10920 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}% 10921 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}% 10922 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}% 10923 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}% 10924 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}% 10925 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}% 10926 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}% 10927 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}% 10928 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}% 10929 % 10930 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}% 10931 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}% 10932 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}% 10933 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}% 10934 % 10935 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}% 10936 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}% 10937 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}% 10938 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}% 10939 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}% 10940 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}% 10941 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}% 10942 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}% 10943 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}% 10944 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}% 10945 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}% 10946 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}% 10947 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}% 10948 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}% 10949 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}% 10950 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}% 10951 % 10952 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}% 10953 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}% 10954 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}% 10955 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}% 10956 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}% 10957 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}% 10958 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}% 10959 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}% 10960 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}% 10961 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}% 10962 % 10963 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}% 10964 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}% 10965 % 10966 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}% 10967 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}% 10968 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}% 10969 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}% 10970 % 10971 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}% 10972 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}% 10973 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}% 10974 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}% 10975 % 10976 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}% 10977 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}% 10978 % 10979 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}% 10980 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}% 10981 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}% 10982 % 10983 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}% 10984 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}% 10985 % 10986 % Punctuation 10987 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}% 10988 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}% 10989 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}% 10990 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}% 10991 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}% 10992 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}% 10993 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}% 10994 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}% 10995 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}% 10996 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}% 10997 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}% 10998 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}% 10999 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}% 11000 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}% 11001 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}% 11002 % 11003 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}% 11004 % 11005 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion{}}% 11006 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}% 11007 % 11008 % Mathematical symbols 11009 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}% 11010 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}% 11011 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}% 11012 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}% 11013 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}% 11014 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}% 11015 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}% 11016 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}% 11017 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}% 11018 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}% 11019 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}% 11020 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}% 11021 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}% 11022 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}% 11023 % 11024 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}% 11025 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}% 11026 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}% 11027 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}% 11028 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}% 11029 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}% 11030 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}% 11031 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}% 11032 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}% 11033 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}% 11034 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}% 11035 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}% 11036 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}% 11037 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}% 11038 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}% 11039 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}% 11040 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}% 11041 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}% 11042 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}% 11043 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}% 11044 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}% 11045 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}% 11046 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}% 11047 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}% 11048 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}% 11049 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}% 11050 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}% 11051 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}% 11052 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}% 11053 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}% 11054 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}% 11055 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}% 11056 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}% 11057 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}% 11058 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}% 11059 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}% 11060 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}% 11061 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}% 11062 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}% 11063 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}% 11064 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}% 11065 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}% 11066 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}% 11067 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}% 11068 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}% 11069 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}% 11070 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}% 11071 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}% 11072 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}% 11073 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}% 11074 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}% 11075 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}% 11076 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}% 11077 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}% 11078 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}% 11079 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}% 11080 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}% 11081 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}% 11082 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}% 11083 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}% 11084 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}% 11085 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}% 11086 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}% 11087 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}% 11088 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}% 11089 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}% 11090 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}% 11091 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}% 11092 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}% 11093 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}% 11094 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}% 11095 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}% 11096 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}% 11097 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}% 11098 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}% 11099 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}% 11100 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}% 11101 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}% 11102 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}% 11103 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}% 11104 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}% 11105 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11106 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 11107 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}% 11108 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}% 11109 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}% 11110 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}% 11111 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}% 11112 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}% 11113 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}% 11114 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}% 11115 % 11116 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}% 11117 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}% 11118 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}% 11119 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}% 11120 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11121 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}% 11122 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}% 11123 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}% 11124 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}% 11125 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}% 11126 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}% 11127 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}% 11128 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}% 11129 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}% 11130 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}% 11131 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}% 11132 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}% 11133 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}% 11134 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}% 11135 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}% 11136 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}% 11137 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}% 11138 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}% 11139 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}% 11140 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}% 11141 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}% 11142 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}% 11143 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}% 11144 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}% 11145 % 11146 \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign 11147 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}% 11148}% end of \unicodechardefs 11149 11150% UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command) 11151% It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence. 11152\def\utfeightchardefs{% 11153 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii 11154 \unicodechardefs 11155} 11156 11157% Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to 11158% non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to 11159% write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for 11160% printing the correct glyphs. 11161\newif\ifpassthroughchars 11162\passthroughcharsfalse 11163 11164% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11165% provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character 11166% 11167\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{% 11168 \catcode"#1=\active 11169 \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{% 11170 \begingroup 11171 \uccode`\~="##2\relax 11172 \uppercase{\gdef~}{% 11173 \ifpassthroughchars 11174 ##1% 11175 \else 11176 ##3% 11177 \fi 11178 } 11179 \endgroup 11180 } 11181 \begingroup 11182 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 11183 \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}% 11184 \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}% 11185 \endgroup 11186} 11187 11188% Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition. 11189% It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters. 11190\def\nativeunicodechardefs{% 11191 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative 11192 \unicodechardefs 11193} 11194 11195% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11196% make the character token expand 11197% to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing. 11198\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{% 11199 \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2} 11200 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp 11201} 11202 11203% @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX). 11204\def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{% 11205 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU 11206 \unicodechardefs 11207} 11208 11209% US-ASCII character definitions. 11210\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 11211 \relax 11212} 11213 11214% Define all Unicode characters we know about. This makes UTF-8 the default 11215% input encoding and allows @U to work. 11216\iftxinativeunicodecapable 11217 \nativeunicodechardefsatu 11218\else 11219 \utfeightchardefs 11220\fi 11221 11222\message{formatting,} 11223 11224\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 11225 11226\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 11227\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 11228\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 11229 11230% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 11231\vbadness = 10000 11232 11233% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 11234\hbadness = 6666 11235 11236% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 11237\widowpenalty=10000 11238\clubpenalty=10000 11239 11240% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 11241% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 11242% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 11243% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 11244% 11245\def\setemergencystretch{% 11246 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 11247 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 11248 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 11249 \else 11250 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 11251 \fi 11252} 11253 11254% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 11255% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 11256% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 11257% 11258% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 11259% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 11260% 11261\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 11262 \voffset = #3\relax 11263 \topskip = #6\relax 11264 \splittopskip = \topskip 11265 % 11266 \vsize = #1\relax 11267 \advance\vsize by \topskip 11268 \outervsize = \vsize 11269 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 11270 \txipageheight = \vsize 11271 % 11272 \hsize = #2\relax 11273 \outerhsize = \hsize 11274 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 11275 \txipagewidth = \hsize 11276 % 11277 \normaloffset = #4\relax 11278 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 11279 % 11280 \ifpdf 11281 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11282 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11283 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 11284 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 11285 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 11286 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 11287 \else 11288 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 11289 \special{papersize=#8,#7}% 11290 \else 11291 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11292 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11293 % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin. 11294 \fi 11295 \fi 11296 % 11297 \setleading{\textleading} 11298 % 11299 \parindent = \defaultparindent 11300 \setemergencystretch 11301} 11302 11303% @letterpaper (the default). 11304\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11305 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11306 \textleading = 13.2pt 11307 % 11308 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 11309 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 11310 {\voffset}{.25in}% 11311 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 11312 {11in}{8.5in}% 11313}} 11314 11315% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 11316\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11317 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 11318 \textleading = 12pt 11319 % 11320 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 11321 {-.2in}{0in}% 11322 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 11323 {9.25in}{7in}% 11324 % 11325 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 11326 \tolerance = 700 11327 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11328 \defbodyindent = .5cm 11329}} 11330 11331% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 11332% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 11333\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11334 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 11335 \textleading = 12pt 11336 % 11337 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 11338 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 11339 {0pt}{14pt}% 11340 {9in}{6in}% 11341 % 11342 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 11343 \tolerance = 700 11344 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11345 \defbodyindent = .4cm 11346}} 11347 11348% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 11349\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11350 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11351 \textleading = 13.2pt 11352 % 11353 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 11354 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 11355 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 11356 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 11357 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 11358 % your texinfo source file like this: 11359 % @tex 11360 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 11361 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 11362 % @end tex 11363 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 11364 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11365 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11366 {297mm}{210mm}% 11367 % 11368 \tolerance = 700 11369 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11370 \defbodyindent = 5mm 11371}} 11372 11373% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 11374% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 11375% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 11376\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11377 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 11378 \textleading = 12.5pt 11379 % 11380 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 11381 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11382 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 11383 {210mm}{148mm}% 11384 % 11385 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 11386 \tolerance = 800 11387 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11388 \defbodyindent = 2mm 11389 \tableindent = 12mm 11390}} 11391 11392% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 11393\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 11394 \afourpaper 11395 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 11396 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 11397 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11398 {297mm}{210mm}% 11399 % 11400 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 11401 \globaldefs = 0 11402}} 11403 11404% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 11405\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 11406 \afourpaper 11407 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 11408 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 11409 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11410 {297mm}{210mm}% 11411 \globaldefs = 0 11412}} 11413 11414% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 11415% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 11416% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 11417% 11418\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 11419\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 11420 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 11421 \globaldefs = 1 11422 % 11423 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11424 \setleading{\textleading}% 11425 % 11426 \dimen0 = #1\relax 11427 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 11428 \advance\dimen0 by 1in % reference point for DVI is 1 inch from top of page 11429 % 11430 \dimen2 = \hsize 11431 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 11432 \advance\dimen2 by 1in % reference point is 1 inch from left edge of page 11433 % 11434 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 11435 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 11436 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11437 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 11438}} 11439 11440% Set default to letter. 11441% 11442\letterpaper 11443 11444% Default value of \hfuzz, for suppressing warnings about overfull hboxes. 11445\hfuzz = 1pt 11446 11447 11448\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 11449 11450\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment 11451 11452% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. 11453\catcode`\^^? = 14 11454 11455% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 11456\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} 11457\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 11458\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} 11459\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} 11460\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} 11461\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} 11462\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} 11463\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} 11464\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} 11465 11466% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 11467% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 11468% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 11469% 11470% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 11471% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 11472% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 11473% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 11474% 11475\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11476 11477% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 11478% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 11479% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 11480% this is not a problem. 11481\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11482 11483% Set catcodes for Texinfo file 11484 11485% Active characters for printing the wanted glyph. 11486% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 11487% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 11488% 11489\catcode`\"=\active 11490\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 11491\let"=\activedoublequote 11492\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde 11493\chardef\hatchar=`\^ 11494\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat 11495 11496\catcode`\_=\active 11497\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 11498\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 11499\let\realunder=_ 11500 11501\catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}} 11502 11503\chardef \less=`\< 11504\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless 11505\chardef \gtr=`\> 11506\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr 11507\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} 11508\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 11509\catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash 11510 11511 11512% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page 11513% breaks in the middle of an @tex block. 11514\def\texinfochars{% 11515 \let< = \activeless 11516 \let> = \activegtr 11517 \let~ = \activetilde 11518 \let^ = \activehat 11519 \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault 11520 \let\b = \strong 11521 \let\i = \smartitalic 11522 % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too. 11523} 11524 11525% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 11526% parsing them. 11527\def\turnoffactive{% 11528 \normalturnoffactive 11529 \otherbackslash 11530} 11531 11532\catcode`\@=0 11533 11534% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 11535% as in \char`\\. 11536\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 11537\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work 11538 11539% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and 11540% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). 11541{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} 11542 11543% In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 11544% in fixed width font. 11545\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. 11546 11547% Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use 11548% \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char 11549% of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol 11550% font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex 11551% sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar, 11552% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; 11553% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the 11554% usual hex value because it has already been made active. 11555 11556@def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} 11557@let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. 11558 11559% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. 11560% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 11561% catcode other. We switch back and forth between these. 11562@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} 11563@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 11564 11565% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 11566% the literal character `\'. 11567% 11568{@catcode`- = @active 11569 @gdef@normalturnoffactive{% 11570 @passthroughcharstrue 11571 @let-=@normaldash 11572 @let"=@normaldoublequote 11573 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 11574 @let+=@normalplus 11575 @let<=@normalless 11576 @let>=@normalgreater 11577 @let^=@normalcaret 11578 @let_=@normalunderscore 11579 @let|=@normalverticalbar 11580 @let~=@normaltilde 11581 @let\=@ttbackslash 11582 @markupsetuplqdefault 11583 @markupsetuprqdefault 11584 @unsepspaces 11585 } 11586} 11587 11588% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 11589% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 11590% So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on. 11591@catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other 11592 11593% \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo' 11594% 11595% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 11596% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 11597% a backslash. 11598% If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after 11599% the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error. 11600% This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex. 11601% We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden. 11602{ 11603@catcode`@^=7 11604@catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{% 11605 @global@let\ = @eatinput% 11606 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11607 @def@c{@fixbackslash@c}% 11608 % Definition for the newline at the end of this file. 11609 @def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}% 11610 % Definition for a newline in the main Texinfo file. 11611 @gdef @secondlinenl{@fixbackslash}% 11612 % In case the first line has a whole-line command on it 11613 @let@originalparsearg@parsearg 11614 @def@parsearg{@fixbackslash@originalparsearg} 11615}} 11616 11617{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11618@gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}} 11619 11620% Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token 11621% appears by mistake. 11622{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13% 11623@gdef@enableemergencynewline{% 11624 @gdef^^M{% 11625 @par% 11626 %<warning: active newline>@par% 11627}}} 11628 11629 11630@gdef@fixbackslash{% 11631 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi 11632 @catcode13=5 % regular end of line 11633 @enableemergencynewline 11634 @let@c=@texinfoc 11635 @let@parsearg@originalparsearg 11636 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 11637 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 11638 @catcode`+=@active 11639 @catcode`@_=@active 11640 % 11641 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 11642 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. This macro, @fixbackslash, gets 11643 % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file. Not opening texinfo.cnf 11644 % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format 11645 % file for Texinfo. 11646 % 11647 @openin 1 texinfo.cnf 11648 @ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi 11649 @closein 1 11650} 11651 11652 11653% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 11654@escapechar = `@@ 11655 11656% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need 11657% active definitions as the normal characters. 11658@def@normaldot{.} 11659@def@normalquest{?} 11660@def@normalslash{/} 11661 11662% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 11663% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. 11664@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} 11665@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} 11666@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} 11667 11668@let @hashchar = @normalhash 11669 11670@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and 11671@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we 11672@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. 11673@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. 11674@catcode`@'=@active 11675@catcode`@`=@active 11676@markupsetuplqdefault 11677@markupsetuprqdefault 11678 11679@c Local variables: 11680@c eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp) 11681@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page" 11682@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 11683@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 11684@c time-stamp-end: "}" 11685@c End: 11686 11687@c vim:sw=2: 11688 11689@enablebackslashhack 11690
